HP Hewlett Packard Network Card 4250 User Manual

Product Overview  
Links within this page:  
Links to related pages:  
Product Introduction  
Figure 1: The HP Print Server PSA 4250  
The HP Print Server Appliance 4250 is a state-of-the-art device for managing and monitoring printing over a  
network. It is a network device that has been designed to provide a quick and easy way to add print capacity  
without affecting the general purpose server. It has several distinct advantages over conventional network printing  
configurations which can result in improved performance in both printing and file access. These advantages are  
discussed below.  
Microsoft NT domain security, also known as Microsoft NT Authentication and Authority, is a feature that allows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
administrators to easily authorize or restrict print administration and services to specific groups or users by using  
their existing user name and password of the NT 4.0 domain. An NT domain is a logical grouping of network servers  
and other computers that share a common security and user account for each user. Users log on to the domain, not  
to individual servers in the domain.  
Installing printers on each client computer is required in order for clients to be able to print using the PSA. With the  
Microsoft Point and Print technology, printers are added to the PSA and associated with a factory-installed driver or  
a driver already associated with a printer. Clients can be easily set up with access to that printer and its driver  
without having to install the driver again.  
In a typical network, general purpose servers manage both the printing tasks and the file/application serving. The  
PSA handles the spooling and network traffic associated with printing, reducing the workload on the general  
purpose server.  
When printing takes place at remote offices or other locations distant from the servers, the speed of printing can be  
degraded. A PSA installed in a remote office can dramatically increase printing performance by eliminating the need  
for print requests to travel from the remote office to the central site and back to a remote office printer.  
An additional benefit is that if general purpose file/application servers go down, remote office users can still print  
many jobs directly, using the PSA.  
Operation and Management  
Once the PSA is configured, virtually no management tasks are required. However, system administrators can  
monitor print activity, manage the printers, or alter the configuration of the PSA from anywhere on the network  
using the PSA's web-based graphical user interface and a supported browser, or by using Web Jetadmin.  
Web Jetadmin plug-ins have been designed to configure and manage multiple PSAs. The Web Jetadmin plug-ins for  
PSA firmware version 2.4.x. are dependent on Web Jetadmin (version 7.2). The Web Jetadmin plug-ins provide LAN  
administrators and IT managers a single tool to manage their printing environment. The plug-ins provide the  
following management capabilities for the PSA:  
Automated migration of printers from Microsoft Windows servers  
Automated migration of existing printer connections on Microsoft Windows clients  
Auto-discovery of PSAs  
Batch configuration of most settings  
Remote print path creation  
Remote management of printer drivers  
Central device status reporting  
Scheduled batch firmware upgrades  
Scheduled backup/restore of configuration settings  
Product Description  
The PSA contains a large disk drive for spooling print jobs from clients. Print jobs are stored on the disk drive. The  
number of print jobs is only limited by the disk space available on the PSA.  
The PSA provides web-accessible printer management and configuration and spools print jobs from the following  
clients:  
Microsoft Windows 95  
Microsoft Windows 98  
Microsoft Windows 2000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Microsoft Windows NT  
Microsoft Windows ME  
Microsoft Windows XP  
UNIX  
Following are some main features of the PSA:  
Off-loads spooling from a UNIX or Windows NT server  
Easy management  
Centralized management using Web Jetadmin  
Virtually no management required once installed  
Supports APC uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs) (simple or basic signaling protocol)  
Increases performance of general purpose servers  
Remote management using Web Jetadmin  
Supports SNMP v1, v2c, and v3  
Provides data privacy, data integrity, and server authentication using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL v2/v3) and  
Transport Layer Security (TLS v1)  
Easy replication of configuration and printer drivers across PSAs  
Reduces network traffic  
Seamless integration into Microsoft networking environment (security, authentication, authorization, and  
active directory)  
Transparent to client users  
Easy to pre-configure before shipping to a remote office  
Password security on the front panel and for the web interface  
10/100Base-TX Ethernet network interface  
Support for native Microsoft client printing tools  
Compatible with Microsoft's Point and Print technology (automatic driver download from the PSA to clients)  
Compatibility with HP Print Servers  
The PSA will work with any HP print server with firmware version x.03 and above.  
Compatibility with Other (Non-HP) Print Servers  
Any print server that supports LPD should work with the PSA. The proper LPD remote queue name for the print  
server might have to be known. Many print servers will work without specifying a remote queue name (use the  
default HP PRINT SERVER setting); however, some require a special string in order to work. The LPD remote queue  
name can be obtained from the print server vendor.  
Product Updates  
When new firmware or other device-specific support information is available for the PSA, the PSA can be notified  
automatically. On the TCP/IP and DNS page, a field Check for print server PSA firmware updates during  
each web login can be checked to enable this feature. If this is checked and new firmware or support information  
is available, the picture of the PSA image on the Overview page in the web interface will change.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
This feature is enabled by default and can be disabled by unchecking this box. Each time an image is retrieved, it is  
logged like any other visit to HP's website. In addition, each request includes the serial number of the requesting  
unit. HP uses this to provide support information relative to the specific unit. No personally identifiable information  
such as user name, email address, or physical address is gathered as part of this process. HP does monitor web  
logs in order to understand our customers and improve our products. All web transactions are subject to HP's  
privacy policy which can be found at:http://www.hp.com/country/us/eng/privacy.htm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Product Specifications  
Links within this page:  
Figure 1: The HP Print Server Appliance 4250 (J7941)  
Model Number  
Product  
Model number  
HP Print Server PSA 4250  
J7941A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Requirements  
The computer printing to the PSA must be running TCP/IP and have Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, XP, or other  
operating systems running LPD.  
Language Options and Power Cord Requirements  
The following localization options are available for the power cord. The power cord must be be a standard IEC-320 female  
power cord, terminated by a male plug appropriate for the country/region of use.  
Country/Region  
Option Code  
Power Cord  
U.S.  
ABA  
8120-6805  
Canada (excluding Quebec)  
Argentina  
Brazil  
AKY  
AKY  
AKY  
401  
8121-0766  
8121-0670  
8121-0765  
8120-6802  
Chile  
Europe, including:  
Austria  
Belgium  
Finland  
France  
Germany  
Italy  
Netherlands  
Norway  
Portugal  
Spain  
Sweden  
Denmark  
ACE  
AR8  
ACC  
8120-6806  
8120-6807  
8120-0550  
Switzerland  
United Kingdom  
Singapore  
South Africa  
ACQ  
8120-6808  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Australia  
New Zealand  
ABG  
AB5  
8120-6810  
8120-0550  
Hong Kong SAR  
Supported Clients  
Clients are networked PCs that submit print jobs to the PSA. The PSA can accept print jobs from the following clients:  
Windows 95  
Windows 98  
Windows NT 4.0  
Windows 2000  
Windows ME  
Windows XP  
Any RFC 1179-compliant LPD client including (not all LPD implementations are RFC 1179-compliant):  
HP-UX 10.x and above  
Solaris  
Linux  
Note: The Microsoft Point and Print feature for Windows NT and Windows 2000 is only supported on an x86 PC.  
The PSA provides easy, consistent PSA management for multiple PSAs simultaneously. An SNMP agent provides network  
device information to monitor, configure, and control networked systems. It provides SNMP clients a method of  
communicating with PSAs for administration over a network. Operations in SNMP are limited to retrieving and modifying  
management information values and reporting events. SNMP v1, v2c, and v3 are supported for the 2.4.x firmware. An SNMP  
MIB defining the PSA's SNMP interface is available from www.hp.com or by contacting HP's support center.  
Supported Printers  
Any printer or print server that supports the LPD protocol should work with the PSA.  
Supported Web Browsers  
The following web browsers are supported:  
Netscape Navigator 6.0 or greater  
Microsoft (R) Internet Explorer 5.5 or greater  
What Ships in the Box  
The following are included in the box:  
1. HP Print Server Appliance 4250 (J7941)  
2. 3 Quick Start Posters (English/Spanish (5990-4778), French/German (5990-4779), and Italian/Portuguese (5990-  
4780))  
3. Documentation CD-ROM (5069-4434 for the CD and sleeve, and 5011-4598 for the CD)  
4. Rackmount Kit (5069-4433)  
5. Power cable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Security Features  
The PSA has a front panel password to prevent unauthorized front panel configuration. It also has a web administrator name  
and password, which are required to configure the device or manage printers (the default user name is admin and the  
default password is admin). Additional web administrator accounts can be added.  
The existing user account information of the NT 4.0 domain (name and password) is used; users or groups of users can be  
authorized to print through the PSA without requiring the creation of user accounts and passwords on the PSA.  
For NT Domain networks, administrators can easily restrict print administration and services to specific groups or users. Valid  
access levels are:  
Print (print, pause, and delete your own print jobs)  
Manage Documents (print, pause, and delete other user's print jobs)  
Full Control (print, pause, and delete other user's print jobs; delete printers; and change security settings using  
native NT tools)  
No Access  
Physical Specifications  
Attribute  
Specification  
Dimensions  
441 millimeters (mm) (17.4 inches) W x 323 mm (12.7 inches) D x 63 mm (2.5  
inches) H  
Weight  
4.6 kilograms (10.1 pounds)  
Temperature  
Operating: +5 degrees Celsius (C) to +40 degrees C (41 degrees Fahrenheit (F)  
to 104 degrees F)  
Non-operating: -40 degrees C to +70 degrees C (-40 degrees F to 158 degrees F)  
Network connection  
Serial port  
RJ-45  
DB-9 (supports all APC uninterruptible power supplies with a Simple Signaling  
cable (APC part # 940-0020B))  
Acoustic noise  
52 dB  
Minimum Hard Drive  
10 Gigabytes  
300 Megahertz  
50  
Minimum Processor Speed  
Recommended Number of Printers  
Supported  
Largest Spoolable File Size  
2 Gigabytes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Minimum Spooling Capacity  
Electrical Specifications  
Attribute  
7 Gigabytes  
Specification  
Power requirements  
Power consumption  
120/240 VAC at 50/60 Hz  
100-127 V ~ 1000mA  
200-240 V ~ 750mA  
Power connection  
IEC-320  
Environmental Specifications  
Attribute  
Specification  
Relative humidity  
Temperature  
80 percent at 40 degrees C (104 degrees F)  
(Operating) +5 degrees Celsius (C) (41 degrees Fahrenheit (F)) to +40 degrees  
Celsius (104 degrees F)  
(Non-operating) -40 degrees Celsius (-38 degrees F) to +70 degrees Celsius (158  
degrees F)  
Safety Certifications  
Products comply with:  
IEC 950: (1991)+A1,A2,A3,A4/EN60950 (1992)+A1,A2,A3,A4  
UL 1950  
CSA 950  
NOM-019-SCFI-1994  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Web Interface for the PSA  
Links within this page:  
The PSA contains a web server. The web server allows administrators to manage the configuration of the PSA,  
review the status of the device, and view print jobs from your web browser.  
This page explains what can be configured through this interface and how to access the web interface on the PSA.  
Supported Web Browsers  
The following web browsers are supported:  
Netscape Navigator 6.0 or greater  
Microsoft (R) Internet Explorer 5.5 or greater  
Accessing the Web Interface  
Follow these steps to access the web interface:  
1. Open the web browser.  
2. In the Location field (Netscape Navigator) or Address field (Microsoft Internet Explorer), enter the IP  
address of the PSA, as displayed on the front panel liquid-crystal display (LCD) (for example:  
http://10.1.2.3).  
Or, type the DNS name of the PSA (if the DNS server has been configured with the correct name entry).  
3. Type the administrator name and password. (The default is "admin" for the user name and "admin" for the  
password.) The Overview page is displayed with the menu on the left.  
The Overview page displays general information about the PSA.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Menu  
The menu is always displayed on the left side of the displayed page in the web interface. Click on any of the  
following topics listed on the menu for more information:  
Print Services  
Networking  
Security  
Maintenance  
Diagnostics  
Overview Page  
The following information is displayed on the Overview page:  
Overview Page  
Field Name  
Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Print Server Name  
Name as typed in the Print Server Appliance Name field on the Microsoft Network  
Settings page (in the web interface under Networking).  
Appliance Status  
System Load  
Status of this PSA. If a backup, restore, or upgrade is in process, shows the current  
state of that operation.  
Shows how heavily the PSA has been used in the past 15 minutes. (See the System  
Load section on the Diagnostic Report for more information.)  
Disk Usage  
Percentage of disk space used on the PSA.  
DNS Servers  
Lists the number of configured DNS servers that are reachable across the network. This  
value is updated every ten minutes or whenever Diagnostics are run.  
WINS Servers  
Microsoft Domain  
DNS Domain  
IP Address  
Lists the number of configured WNS servers that are reachable across the network. This  
value is updated every ten minutes or whenever Diagnostics are run.  
If Domain Mode is enabled on the PSA (on the Microsoft Network Settings page) ,  
this displays the name of the domain it is a member of and its status.  
The DNS Domain name as typed in the DNS Domain field on the TCP/IP and DNS page  
(in the web interface under Networking).  
The IP address for the PSA as typed on the IP Address field on the TCP/IP and DNS  
page (in the web interface under Networking).  
Ethernet Address  
Serial Number  
The PSA's IEEE Ethernet (802.3) Link Level MAC (Media Access Control) address.  
Serial number for the PSA.  
Firmware revision  
Firmware revision number currently on the PSA.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Date and Time  
Use the Date and Time Settings page to set the date and time of the PSA.  
Field Name  
Day  
Description  
Type the day of the month numerically (for example: "01" or "20").  
Type the month (for example: "01", "02", and so on).  
Type the four-digit year (for example, "2003").  
Month  
Year  
Time  
Type the time in the format: hh:mm:ss. The seconds and leading zeroes may be omitted (for  
example: "5:35" and "12:00:00").  
AM/PM  
Use the drop-down box to select AM or PM. The 24-hour time format is not supported.  
Select the appropriate time zone from the drop-down box.  
Time Zone  
Click  
to keep the time and date at their previous values, or click  
to set the date and time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Links to related pages:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Links within this document:  
Links to related documents:  
What Ships in the Box  
The following items ship with PSA. If something is missing from the box, please contact the HP Dealer or Reseller  
where the PSA was purchased.  
Figure 1: Contents of the box  
Steps for Installation and Configuration  
To install the PSA, complete these steps:  
1. Unpack the PSA, and make sure the six items are included in the box.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Attach its rubber feet for desktop, rack shelf, or under-printer installation. For rackmount installation, click  
here.  
4. Configure the IP settings using the front panel (for the first time). The IP address can be changed through  
the web interface if desired.  
5. Access the web interface.  
6. Complete the TCP/IP and DNS Settings page (on the menu under Networking).  
7. Complete the Microsoft Network Settings page (on the menu under Networking) to identify the WINS  
server address and the Windows NT domain or workgroup. For NT Domain security, complete the other  
fields on this page.  
10. Be sure to register the PSA (http://www.hp.com/go/printappliance_registration).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Printers on Clients  
Links within this document:  
Links to related documents:  
Installing printers on each client computer is required in order for clients to be able to print using the PSA.  
Note: Hewlett-Packard recommends verifying installation with one client computer before configuring more clients.  
This will confirm operation. It is easier to troubleshoot settings on one client computer than on many.  
Installing Printers on Microsoft Clients (the Microsoft Point and Print feature)  
Use one of the following procedures to install printers on each client computer (this feature is only supported on an  
x86 PC running Microsoft Windows 9x, ME, NT, 2K, or XP). Before you begin, check the following:  
The PSA is installed on the network and properly configured.  
Each client workstation is connected to the network.  
The printers are set up and turned on.  
For Windows 9x, ME, NT, and 2K:  
1. On the client workstation, click Tools in Microsoft's Explorer and select Find… Computer. Type the name  
or IP address of the PSA. Or, find the PSA in the Network Neighborhood.  
2. Open the Printers folder.  
3. Right-click on the printer to install.  
4. Select Install from the drop-down menu.  
5. For Windows NT, 2000, and XP clients, driver installation is complete. For Windows 95, 98, and ME clients, a  
wizard will ask several things (for example, Do you want to print from DOS, and so forth.).  
Or:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. On the client workstation, click Start-->Settings-->Printers.  
2. Double-click the Add Printer icon.  
3. Select the Network print server radio button.  
4. Select the PSA and printer from the list box. Or, type the Universal Naming Convention (UNC) path (for  
example: "\\spooler1\printer1"). See Microsoft documentation for more information about UNC. Click OK.  
5. Answer subsequent questions to complete the driver installation.  
For Windows XP:  
1. On the client workstation, click Start and then choose My Computer. Under Other Places, click My  
Network Places. Now click Search on the toolbar and type the name or IP address of the PSA.  
2. Double-click the PSA that was found. This will expand into a list of printers available on the PSA.  
3. Right-click on the printer and click Connect to install. The printer should now be in the printers and faxes  
folder.  
Or:  
1. On the client workstation, click Start and then choose Printers and Faxes.  
2. Under Printer Tasks select Add a printer.Double-click the Add Printer icon.  
3. Select the Network print server radio button.  
4. Select the Connect to this printer radio button and type the Universal Naming Convention (UNC) path (for  
example: "\\spooler1\printer1"). See Microsoft documentation for more information about UNC. Click Next.  
5. Answer subsequent questions to complete the driver installation.  
Bypassing Point and Print  
Installing printers on each client computer is required in order for clients to be able to print using the PSA. With the  
Microsoft Point and Print technology, when a printer is added to a client, an associated driver is automatically  
installed on the client also. This helps make printer installation easy. However, the driver associated with a given  
printer can only be managed at an administrator level, so changes to that driver such as enabling duplex or  
changing the driver itself will be reflected on all Windows NT, 2K, and XP clients using that printer; only one driver  
can be associated with a given printer.  
In order to bypass this functionality, clients can install a local printer that uses a local port to print through the PSA.  
Note: This requires the client to install a driver locally. Because the installed printer is viewed by the computer as a  
local printer, it will not receive job status feedback from the PSA. For example, if the printer on the PSA has been  
paused, the client printer will not reflect this and it may look like a job was printed when it was not.  
To install a local printer with local driver that prints through the PSA, follow the following steps.  
For Windows 2000 and XP Clients:  
1. Start the Add Printer wizard (in Windows 2000 or XP).  
2. Click Next.  
3. On the Local or Network Printer screen, select Local printer and then click Next.  
Note: On this screen, make sure Automatically detect and install any Plug and Play printer is not  
selected.  
4. On the Select the Printer Port screen, select Create a new port and then select Local Port as the  
Type. Click Next.  
5. On the Port Name screen, type the UNC name for the printer in the following format and click OK:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
\\<psa_name>\<printer_name> (where "psa_name" is the name of the PSA and "printer_name" is the  
name of the printer)  
6. On the screen showing printer manufacturers and printers, select a printer driver and then click Next.  
7. On the Name Your Printer screen, specify a printer name and then click Next.  
8. On the Printer Sharing screen, select Do not share this printer and then click Next.  
9. On the Print Test Page screen, click Next.  
10. Click Finish.  
For Windows NT Clients:  
Note: Before you begin, make sure you have Microsoft's Service Pack 6a (or greater) installed on the client(s).  
1. Start the Add Printer wizard (in Windows NT).  
2. Select My Computer and click Next.  
3. On the screen showing available ports, click on the Add Port button.  
4. On the Printer Ports screen, select Local Port and then click New Port.  
5. On the Port Name screen, type the UNC name for the printer in the following format and click OK:  
\\<psa_name>\<printer_name> (where "psa_name" is the name of the PSA and "printer_name" is the  
name of the printer)  
6. Click OK.  
7. On the Printer Ports screen, click Close.  
8. On the screen showing available ports, select your newly created port and click Next.  
9. On the screen showing printer manufacturers and printers, select a printer driver and then click Next.  
10. On the screen asking for a printer name, enter your printer name and click Next.  
11. On the screen referring to printer sharing, select Not Shared and click Next.  
12. Click Finish.  
Configuring Printing for UNIX Clients  
The following topics are discussed in the section:  
A print queue must be set up for each printer or printer personality (text, PCL, or PostScript) used.  
If printing text documents from UNIX clients to an HP Jetdirect print server, a special queue must be configured on  
the PSA. First add the printer through the Print Share page in the web interface. On the Identify Printer page, for  
connectivity select Other and then specify the Remote Queue Name. For the remote queue name on the target  
printer, TEXT must be specified (or TEXT2, TEXT3 for multi-port Jetdirect print servers). This must be done even  
though the target printer is an HP Jetdirect device. Use the normal print queue when printing jobs that have been  
formatted with a printer-specific page description language such as PDL (like PostScript) or PCL.  
Configuring Print Queues for BSD-like Systems  
If the printer supports automatic language switching, the application may select the printer language using  
commands embedded in the print data.  
Make sure users know the printer names for the printers, since they will have to enter those names on the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
command line for printing.  
Following is an example of configuring print queues for BSD-like systems (for example, Linux):  
1. Edit the /etc/printcap file to include the following entries:  
printer_name:\  
:lp=:\  
:rm=print_appliance_name:\  
:rp=remote_printername_argument:\ (this should be the same as the printer name on the  
appliance)  
:lf=/var/spool/lpd/error_log_filename:\  
:sd=/var/spool/lpd/printername:\  
:sh:  
where printer_nameis the name of the printer on the local computer. , print_appliance_nameidentifies  
the printer on the network, and remote_printername_argumentis the print queue designation on the  
appliance.  
For more information on printcap, see the printcap man page in the UNIX documentation.  
2. Create the spooling directory by making the following entries. As the root user, enter:  
cd /var/spool/lpd  
mkdir printername  
chown root printername  
chgrp lp printername  
chmod 755 printername  
where printernameis the name of the printer on the local computer.  
Configuring Print Queues Using SAM (HP-UX Systems)  
On HP-UX systems, the SAM utility can be used to configure remote print queues for printing.  
Before the SAM program is executed, select an IP address for the appliance and set up an entry in the /etc/hosts  
file on the system running HP-UX. (This is not required if DNS is configured.)  
1. Start the SAM utility as a super user.  
2. Select Printers/Plotters from the Peripheral Devices menu.  
3. Select LP Spooler.  
4. Select Printers/Plotters from the Printers/Plotters menu.  
5. Select Action from the top menu and then select Add Remote Printer or Plotter.  
6. Complete the Add Remote Printer/Plotter screen.  
The Printer Name field should be the local printer name.  
Be sure to check the box Remote Printer is on a BSD System.  
7. Click OK.  
8. Select Exit from the List menu.  
9. Exit SAM.  
Printing a Test File  
To verify that the printer and PSA connections are correct, print a test file.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. At the UNIX prompt type:  
lp -dprintername file_name  
or on a BSD-like system:  
lpr -Pprintername file_name  
where printernameis the name of the printer as added to the appliance, and file_nameis the file to be  
printed.  
2. To get print queue status, type the following at the prompt:  
lpstat printername  
or on a BSD-like system:  
lpq -Pprintername  
where printername is the designated printer.  
Example: lpq -Pappliance1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front Panel  
Links to related pages:  
The following activities can be performed from the front panel:  
The front panel on the HP Print Server Appliance 4250 has the following components:  
LEDs  
There are four indicator lights (LEDs) on the front of the PSA. Understanding how the lights function is important for  
proper operation of the PSA. This page describes normal and problem LED status displays.  
LED  
LED Name  
Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power LED  
ON when power is supplied to the PSA and it is turned on.  
Network Activity LED  
LIT when there is a connection between the PSA and other network devices.  
BLINKS when there is network activity between the PSA and other network  
devices.  
Disk Activity LED  
Alert LED  
ON when there is disk activity on the PSA.  
OFF during normal operations (ON during bootup and shutdown).  
Power Button - Starting Up and Shutting Down the PSA  
Press the Power button to power up the PSA. The bootup process begins. When the device is powered on, the Power LED  
is lit. To turn off the PSA, press the Power button and wait for about 20 seconds for the PSA to power down. The PSA  
performs an orderly shutdown.  
If print jobs are printing when the PSA is powered down, the print jobs will not be completed. Jobs waiting to be printed  
will resume printing when the PSA is fully booted. If the PSA loses power unexpectedly and is not powered down, spooled  
print jobs that had not yet begun printing or print jobs that were in the middle of printing will resume printing when  
power is restored and the PSA is powered up again. If, however, the integrity of the PSA or print jobs are compromised,  
print jobs that were not spooled would have to be resent.  
Front Panel Display  
The LCD display has two rows of 16 characters or spaces. It is used to display the status of the PSA and to display  
configuration information entered at the front panel. The following arrow buttons are displayed on the front panel:  
Indicates that the menu can scroll.  
scrolls up,  
scrolls down.  
Indicates that choices can be toggled through.  
Enter and Cancel Buttons  
Enter. Accept changes or begin an operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cancel changes or end an operation.  
Direction Buttons  
Up. Press this button to return to the previous menu item or step of a procedure. If Enter hasn't been  
pressed, changes will not be applied.  
Down. Press this button to advance to the next menu item or step of a procedure.  
Left. When there is a choice of options (as indicated in the front panel display), press this button to toggle  
backward through the choices.  
Right. When there is a choice of options (as indicated in the front panel display), press this button to toggle  
forward through the choices.  
Numeric Keypad  
The numeric keypad has buttons for the numbers 0-9. Above the keys are letters of the alphabet, like the keypad on a  
telephone.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter numeric values, such as IP address, subnet mask, and so forth, when configuring the  
PSA. The letters above the keys can be useful as a mnemonic aid when entering the device's password.  
Making Entries  
Use  
and  
on the front panel to move the cursor in the front panel display. Enter only numbers from the keypad.  
When the entry is complete, press  
.
Messages on the Front Panel  
When the PSA is powered up, it executes a series of self tests. It then displays a series of messages, including "Booting...  
Configuring... Validating... Extracting... Formatting..." etc.  
When the startup process is complete, the PSA displays a repeating series of normal operating messages.  
The first line of the display shows the PSA name which can be entered from the web interface during configuration (on the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Microsoft Network Settings page). If the name is not typed in the web interface, the default name, based on the device's  
MAC address, is displayed.  
The second line of the display shows date, time, IP address, and firmware version in a repeating sequence.  
Starting Front Panel Operation  
There are three front panel operations: IP configuration, link speed and duplex mode configuration, and password  
Use the web interface to further configure the PSA. Refer back to the Getting Started procedures, or refer directly to  
information about using the web interface to further configure the device.  
Configuring the IP Address Using the Front Panel  
These procedures explain how to configure an Internet Protocol (IP) address on the PSA using the front panel. (The TCP/  
IP and DNS page in the web interface can also be used to do the same.) Configuring the IP address allows the PSA to  
route print tasks properly.  
If the network does not use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), use the front panel of the PSA to manually  
enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.  
Configuring the IP Address  
Display  
Action  
To begin configuring the IP address, press  
once.  
Press  
again.  
Select the mode by pressing  
or  
to toggle between Manual and DHCP.  
Press  
to continue.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If Manual: Use the number buttons on the front panel of the PSA to enter the  
IP address. Then press  
.
If DHCP: Press  
to continue.  
If Manual: Use the number buttons on the front panel of the PSA to enter the  
subnet mask. Press  
.
If DHCP: Press  
to continue.  
If Manual: Use the numbers on the front panel of the PSA to enter the  
default gateway. Press  
.
If DHCP: Press  
to continue.  
Press  
Press  
.
.
After a moment, the PSA will resume displaying normal operating messages if  
the IP address is valid.  
Configuring the Link Speed and Duplex Mode Using the Front Panel  
These procedures explain how to configure the link speed (100 Mbps or 10 Mbps) and the duplex mode (full or half) for  
the PSA using the front panel. This can be done manually or the settings can be automatically detected (which is the  
default). The link speed is the speed at which the PSA communicates over the network. The speed is expressed in  
megabits per second and is either 10 or 100. The duplex mode defines whether data can be sent at the same time it is  
received:  
Full duplex: data can flow both directions at the same time  
Half duplex: data can only flow one way at a time and any attempt to do both at the same time creates a  
collision.  
The current setting is displayed on the System Summary page (under Maintenance in the web interface).  
Display  
Action  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To begin configuring the link speed and duplex mode for the PSA, press  
once.  
Press  
to skip the IP configuration and to go to the Link Speed and Duplex  
Mode configuration.  
Press  
.
Select the link mode by pressing  
or  
to toggle between Manual and  
Auto Detect.  
Press  
to being configuring the link speed.  
If Manual mode: Press  
or  
to select the link speed (10 Mbps or 100  
Mbps).  
If Auto Detect mode: The detected setting is displayed (10 Mbps or  
100Mbps).  
Press  
to begin configuring the duplex mode.  
If Manual mode: Press  
or  
to select the duplex mode (Half or Full).  
If Auto Detect mode: The detected duplex mode is displayed (Half or Full).  
Press  
Press  
to continue.  
.
Then press  
to apply changes, or press  
to cancel the changes.  
Setting or Changing the Front Panel Password  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
There are two types of passwords that can be set for the PSA: a front panel password (one per PSA) and an administrator  
password (can be multiple accounts, but there must be at least one), which enables access to the web interface to  
manage the PSA. The front panel password is discussed in this section.  
There is no front panel password until it is set. This password limits access to front panel functions. A password will  
prevent unauthorized configuration changes. After the front panel password is set, it must be entered before future  
configuration tasks can be performed at the front panel display.  
To set or change the front panel password, press  
once. The following messages are displayed:  
Press  
Press  
.
Type a new password and press  
.
Retype the new password and press  
.
The front panel displays this message briefly.  
Press  
to end the operation and the device will return to the display of  
normal operating messages.  
Or, after a moment, it will display normal operating messages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Installation  
Links within this document:  
Links to related documents:  
This document explains how to connect the components of the appliance. When installing the hardware for the  
appliance, be certain to carefully follow all instructions to ensure the proper connection and function of the  
appliance.  
Desktop/Rack Shelf/Under-Printer Installation  
Use the following procedure to perform the desktop/rack shelf/under-printer installation:  
CAUTION: For under-printer installation, the appliance can support printers that weigh up to 60 pounds.  
Do not place heavier printers on the appliance.  
1. Turn the appliance so it rests on its top.  
2. The appliance ships with a set of four self-adhesive rubber "feet" on a paper backing sheet. Remove each  
foot from the paper backing. Install each foot on the bottom of the appliance in the indentation provided.  
Press each foot firmly into place.  
3. Turn the appliance over so it rests on its rubber feet.  
4. Locate the appliance for easy access to a power source and network connection. It may be located on any  
solid surface, in a rack shelf, or under a printer.  
Rackmount Installation  
The appliance may be rack-mounted into industry-standard instrument/computer racks. The appliance is shipped  
with a pair of rack-mount brackets with four screws. There are also four screws for mounting the brackets to the  
appliance in the rack.  
The appliance requires 1.5 rack units (RU) of vertical space. It does not require rails for rack mounting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Note: The rackmount installation should be performed by an experienced individual, using appropriate tools, and  
exercising appropriate safety precautions.  
Use the following procedure to perform the rackmount installation:  
1. Attach the rackmount brackets to the sides of the appliance.  
2. Position the appliance in the rack.  
3. Install the appliance into the rack. Use all of the provided screws in both vertical rails of the rack.  
Caution: To prevent unstable mounting of the appliance, Hewlett-Packard recommends using two screws  
per bracket.  
Cable Connections  
Use the following steps to connect the cables:  
1. DB-9 Serial Port (supports all APC uninterruptible power supplies with a Simple Signaling cable (APC  
part # 940-0020B))  
2. RJ-45 Network Jack  
3. Power Receptacle  
1. Connect a twisted pair network cable (not included) with an RJ-45 connector to the RJ-45 jack on the back  
of the appliance (see Figure 1, number 2).  
2. Connect the other end of the network cable to a network port.  
3. If using an APC uninterruptible power supply (UPS), connect a Simple Signaling cable from the UPS to the  
DB-9 serial port on the back of the appliance.  
Note: The Simple Signaling cable is not included with the appliance or with the APC UPS. This cable can be  
ordered from APC (APC part # 940-0020B).  
4. Connect the power cable to the power receptacle on the back of the appliance.  
Note: Make certain that air flow is not restricted around the back of the unit.  
5. Connect the other end of the power cable to a power source. If a UPS is being used, connect the power  
cable to the UPS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Turn on the appliance by pressing the Power button on the front panel.  
For initial installation, the IP address for the appliance can now be configured. Refer back to the Getting Started  
procedures, or refer directly to information about configuring IP addresses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TCP/IP and DNS Settings  
Links within this page:  
Links to related pages:  
TCP/IP and DNS Settings  
The TCP/IP and DNS Settings page is accessible under Networking on the menu in the web interface. On this  
page, administrators can configure:  
the IP address  
subnet mask  
gateway  
Primary Domain Name Server (DNS) address  
Secondary Domain Name Server (DNS) address  
DNS Domain Name  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
screen to change  
Field Name  
Description  
Obtain an IP address automatically using DHCP  
Select this option for the PSA to be automatically  
configured using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
(DHCP). Ensure that a valid DHCP server and address  
leases are available. If DHCP was chosen, the IP  
address, subnet mask, and default gateway will be  
automatically configured.  
Manually specify IP information  
Select this option to manually specify the IP address  
information for the PSA. Each field must be entered  
manually.  
IP address  
Enter an IP address without leading zeroes (for  
example: "10.1.2.3").  
Subnet Mask  
Enter a subnet mask (for example: "255.0.0.0").  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default Gateway  
Enter the IP address of the default gateway used to  
access other networks or subnets. This enables the  
PSA to communicate with devices (such as printers and  
PCs) on different subnets.  
If a gateway is not available, or if the address of the  
gateway is unknown, enter the same IP address used  
for the PSA, or leave this field blank (or empty).  
Primary Domain Name Server (DNS) Address  
The DNS enables network resources (such as PCs and  
printers) to be specified by their friendly names instead  
of their IP addresses. In order to use this functionality,  
specify the primary DNS server by its IP address, not  
by its friendly name. Once the primary DNS is  
specified, use friendly names across other  
configuration areas of the PSA (such as the queue  
configuration screen). If the network does not have a  
DNS, leave this field blank (or empty).  
Secondary Domain Name Server (DNS) Address  
If the primary DNS is unavailable, this server will be  
contacted. Specify the secondary DNS server by its IP  
address, not by its friendly name. After this is server  
specified, use friendly names across other  
configuration areas of the PSA (such as the queue  
configuration screen). If the network does not have a  
DNS, leave this field blank (or empty).  
DNS Domain Name  
The DNS domain name. For example, a server named  
mail.hp.com (hp.com is the DNS name and mail is the  
host name).  
The domain name must match standard naming  
conventions. The name must be alphanumeric. It may  
also contain dashes ( - ) (for example : mycompany.  
com).  
If the network does not have a DNS domain name,  
"defaultdomain" is entered as the default.  
Check for Print Server PSA firmware updates  
during each web login  
The Overview page can display new information  
regarding the PSA if this box is checked.  
Configuring the PSA Using the Web Interface  
1. At a workstation, access the web browser.  
2. Log on to the PSA as an administrator (The default is "admin" for the user name and "admin" for the  
password.)  
3. Complete the TCP/IP and DNS Settings page. See the description of the fields (above) for more  
information.  
4. Click  
.
After this screen has been completed, complete the Microsoft Networking Settings page to identify the WINS server  
address and the Windows NT domain or workgroup. For the Windows NT domain security feature, complete the  
other fields on that page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Microsoft Network Settings  
Links within this page:  
Links to related pages:  
Microsoft Network Settings Page  
The Microsoft Network Settings page is accessible from the menu (under Networking in the web interface). On  
this page, administrators can:  
change the name of the PSA.  
identify the primary and secondary WINS server addresses.  
identify the Windows domain or workgroup.  
enable Microsoft Domain authentication.  
Microsoft Network Settings Page  
Field Name  
Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Print Server  
Appliance  
Name  
Type a name for the PSA. The PSA name will be displayed:  
In the Network Neighborhood and in My Network Places on each client workstation.  
Both are visible from Microsoft Windows Explorer.  
On the Overview page in the web interface for the PSA.  
On the front panel of the PSA.  
If the network uses DNS to identify network resources, this name should match the DNS  
name.  
The PSA name can contain up to 15 alphanumeric characters. It may also contain hyphens  
( - ) and underscores (_). (This name cannot begin with a hyphen (-), but it can have a  
hyphen within the name. The hyphen cannot be the first character because the PSA name is  
also used as a host name, and the hyphen character is not allowed as the first character in a  
host name.)  
Primary  
WINS Server  
Address  
(Windows Internet Name Server) Enables network resources (such as PCs and printers) to  
be specified by their friendly names instead of their IP addresses. In order to use this  
functionality, specify the primary WINS server by its IP address, not by its friendly name.  
Once the primary WINS server is specified, use friendly names across other configuration  
areas of the PSA (such as the queue configuration screen).  
If the network does not have a WINS server configured, leave this field (and the next field)  
blank. Without a WINS server configured, Windows 95, 98, and ME clients may be unable to  
print to a PSA located on a different subnet. Domain integration may behave unpredictably  
if this field is blank.  
Secondary  
WINS Server  
Address  
If the primary WINS server is unavailable, this secondary server will be contacted. Specify  
the secondary WINS server by its IP address, not by its friendly name.  
If the network does not have a WINS server configured, leave this field blank (or empty).  
Windows  
Domain or  
Workgroup  
Specify the Windows domain or workgroup (NT, 2K, or Windows Server 2003) to which this  
PSA belongs. The PSA will appear under this name in Network Neighborhood.  
Enable  
Domain  
Check this box to enable domain security for the PSA (for NT, 2K, or Windows Server 2003).  
Uncheck the box to disable domain security. (The default is disabled.)  
Authentication  
Automatically  
Discover  
Domain  
Select this to automatically discover the domain controller for the domain or workgroup as  
specified above in the Windows Domain or Workgroup field (for NT, 2K, or Windows  
Server 2003) .  
Controllers  
Manually  
Specify  
Select this to manually specify the domain controllers for NT, 2K, or Windows Server 2003.  
Domain  
Controllers  
Domain  
Controller  
Type the domain controller's name or IP address to be added to the list of Configured  
Domain Controllers; click  
to add it to the list.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specified  
Domain  
Controllers  
List of specified domain controllers to use for user name and password validation. The PSA  
will try to communicate with the first domain controller in the list. If the PSA cannot  
communicate with the first one, it will then try the second domain controller in the list, and  
so forth. If none of the domain controllers in the list are successfully contacted, the PSA will  
attempt to automatically discover a domain controller. Click  
or  
to  
reorder the domain controller names in the list. Click  
to take a domain  
controller off the list. (This is only valid when in manual mode.)  
Domain  
Membership  
Status  
The current status of the PSA's membership in the domain (for NT, 2K, or Windows Server  
2003).  
Create an  
Check this to create a new computer account for the PSA in the domain; then enter the  
domain administrator user name and password below.  
account for  
this device in  
the domain  
Note: A WINS server must be specified in the WINS Server Addressfield on this page.  
Domain  
A valid administrator's name as stored on the Domain Controller.  
Administrator  
Name  
Domain  
A valid administrator's password as stored on the Domain Controller.  
Administrator  
Password  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To complete the Microsoft Network Settings page, follow these steps:  
1. At a workstation, access the web browser and type the IP address for the PSA.  
2. Log on to the PSA as an administrator. (The default user name is "admin" and the default password is  
"admin".)  
3. Under Networking on the menu, select Microsoft Network. (See the description of the fields above for  
more information.)  
4. Complete the Print Appliance Name field.  
5. Complete the Primary WINS Server Address field.  
6. Complete the Secondary WINS Server Address field.  
7. Complete the Windows Domain or Workgroup field.  
8. If the security feature for Windows authentication and authority is being used, complete the other fields on  
this page.  
9. Click  
. The network will be restarted with the new settings.  
Note: Hewlett-Packard recommends backing up the settings after this page is completed.  
Microsoft Windows Domain Authentication Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A domain is a logical grouping of network servers and other computers that share a common security and user  
account for each user. Users log on to the domain, not to individual servers in the domain. Microsoft domain  
security is a feature that allows administrators to easily authorize or restrict print administration and services to  
specific groups or users by using their existing user name and password of the domain.  
The domain security feature provides the following features:  
Seamless integration for the print client user (the native tools for printing and managing personal  
documents work the same as they do with Microsoft spoolers).  
Assignment of permissions are on a per-printer basis.  
Disabling and enabling domain security and authority without losing configuration information.  
Setting or changing permissions using the web interface or native tools.  
Specifying selected groups that can have one of the following four permission levels for each printer, using  
native tools:  
Print (print, pause, and delete your own print jobs)  
Manage Documents (pause and delete other user's print jobs)  
Full Control (print, pause, and delete other user's print jobs, delete printers, and change security  
settings)  
No Access  
Special Access (for some Windows 2000 and XP print permissions that do not map directly to the  
above four permission levels)  
Adding the PSA to a Domain  
There are two ways to add the PSA to a domain:  
Complete the fields on the Microsoft Network Settings page. Type the PSA name and then, at a  
minimum, select the box for Create account for this device in the domain and complete Domain  
Administrator Name and Domain Administrator Password.  
OR  
Create a machine account on the domain controller using Server Manager. A machine account must be  
created before the PSA can join the specified domain.  
Note: This method must be used if a WINS Server was not specified on the Microsoft Network Settings  
page.  
1. Log on to the server as an administrator.  
2. Add the PSA to the domain using the Server Manager.  
3. Log on to the PSA as PSA Administrator using the PSA's web interface. (The default user name is  
"admin" and the default password is "admin".)  
4. Set the domain name on the Microsoft Network Settings page by completing the Windows  
Domain or Workgroup field.  
5. Enable Domain Authentication by checking the box Enable Domain Authentication.  
6. Click  
.
Enabling and Disabling Microsoft Domain Security  
The administrator can, at any time, turn on or off domain security. If domain security is on and the PSA cannot  
communicate with the domain controller over the network, users will not be able to print using the PSA. The  
administrator can turn off domain security, which would enable users to continue printing although no security will  
be enforced. To disable domain security, access the Microsoft Network Settings page, and make sure the box for  
"Enable Domain Authentication" is not checked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
With Domain authentication disabled, local administrator accounts must be used to manage the PSA and access the  
web interface because all domain administrator accounts will be disabled by this action as well.  
Granting Printer Access or Authority to Users and Groups  
On Security page for a specific print share, assign domain users and/or groups appropriate access for that print  
share. The Account(s) to Add to List box (on the left) contains all of the group or user names within the selected  
domain. Select from this list to grant access to the print share and click  
. After the account has been  
granted access, its name will be moved from the Account(s) to Add to List box to the Current Account(s) in  
List box.  
By default, every user on the PSA has print access to any newly created print share.  
Administrator Accounts for the PSA  
There are two types of administrator accounts on the PSA:  
Local Administrator Accounts - user names and passwords are stored on the PSA and are not  
synchronized with any domain accounts.  
Domain Administrator Accounts - user names and passwords are synchronized with domain accounts.  
If domain authentication is enabled on the Microsoft Network Settings page, both local and domain administrator  
accounts can be added to the PSA.  
accounts can be added to the PSA.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
LPD  
Links within this page:  
Links to related pages:  
This feature enables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) protocol (sometimes referred to as "BSD compatible" network  
printing) to spool and control print jobs on the PSA from any RFC 1179-compliant LPD client including:  
HP-UX 10.x and above  
Solaris  
Linux  
AIX 4.3 and above  
Note: Not all LPD implementations are RFC 1179-compliant.  
LPD print jobs are visible to Windows clients, but Windows users cannot manage (pause, resume, restart or cancel)  
them unless that user has the appropriate administrative rights on the PSA.  
Both UNIX and Windows clients can simultaneously print to the same printer regardless of whether a printer driver  
has been associated with the printer.  
As a default, LPD printing is enabled for all hosts. Administrators can restrict printing to a certain set of hosts, if  
desired.  
Note: The PSA does not process control files for printing options such as number of copies. Instead it will pass this  
information straight through to the target device and the target device may choose to handle or ignore these  
options.  
LPD Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
On the LPD Settings page, the administrator can enable or disable LPD printing.  
LPD Settings Page  
Field Name  
Description  
Disable LPD printing  
Disables LPD printing and print job management from any and  
all hosts.  
Enable LPD printing from ALL hosts  
Enables LPD printing and print job management from any and  
all hosts (default).  
Enable LPD printing from specified hosts  
Enables LPD printing and print job management from the hosts  
typed in the Host Names list on this screen. If this is selected,  
the fully qualified domain name or IP address of each computer  
system using LPD must be typed. (Without the fully qualified  
name, this will not work.)  
Host Name or IP Address  
Specified LPD Hosts  
Type the host name or IP address to be added to the Specified  
Hosts list. This field is only active when Enable LPD printing  
from specified hosts is selected. For example, host name.  
domain.com or 1.160.10.240.  
Host names permitted to print and manage print jobs using  
LPD. This field is active only when Enable LPD printing from  
specified hosts is selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring LPD Printing  
To enable or disable LPD printing, follow these steps:  
1. In the web interface, click LPD Printing (on the menu under Networking).  
2. Complete the fields as described above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP Settings  
Links within this page:  
Links to related pages:  
SNMP and the PSA  
The SNMP agent supports MIB II (Management Information Base II), Host Resources MIB (portions), its own MIB,  
called the HP-PRINT-SPOOLER-APPLIANCE-MIB, SNMPv3, and SNMPv2 Traps.  
Note: For a copy of the HP-PRINT-SPOOLER-APPLIANCE-MIB, check http://www.hp.com.  
SNMP Traps  
Users can register for traps using the following, as outlined in RFC#2573:  
snmpTargetAddrTable  
snmpNotifyTable  
snmpTargetParamsTable  
Registering for traps through the tables can be difficult; it is recommended that only administrators familiar with the  
tables register for traps in this manner. A simple interface to the tables was added to the PSA's interface.  
Registering for Traps  
The SNMP Settings page is displayed when SNMP is selected (on the menu under Networking).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
SNMP Settings Page  
Description  
Field Name  
Enable SNMPv3  
Select this to enable SNMPv3. User account information will be saved and  
restored during a firmware upgrade.  
User Name  
User name must be between 2 and 32 characters long.  
Must be 32 characters long. Can be numbers 0-9 or characters a-f or A-F.  
Can be numbers 0-9 or characters a-f or A-F.  
Authentication Key  
Privacy Key  
Engine ID  
SNMP v3 engine's administratively unique identifier; used solely for  
identification, not for addressing.  
SNMP Traps: IP Address  
Type the IP address of where the trap is being sent.  
SNMP Traps: Community Name  
Type a community name for the trap packet. ("Public" is a common  
community name.)  
SNMP Traps: Port  
Specify the port number. (Most SNMP agents receive traps on port 162)  
To register for traps, follow these steps:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. At a workstation, access the web browser and type the IP address for the PSA.  
2. Log on to the PSA as an administrator. (The default user name is "admin" and the default password is  
"admin".)  
3. Under Networking on the menu, select SNMP. (See the description of the fields above for more  
information.)  
4. In IP Address, type the IP address for where the trap is to be sent.  
5. In Community Name, type a community name for the trap packet. "Public" is a commonly used  
community name.  
6. In Port, specify the port number. Most SNMP agents receive traps on port 162.  
7. Click  
to complete the registration process. The SNMP agent is shut down and restarted. This  
causes a trap to be sent out:  
1: coldStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1.  
Trap Testing  
The OID snmpTrapTest (1.3.6.1.4.1.11.2.46.2.1.10.4) will cause a trap to be sent to each registered host when set  
to an integer value. For example, if an SNMP set is done on 1.3.6.1.4.1.11.2.46.2.1.10.4.0 with a value of 15, each  
registered host will receive the trap TrapTest (1.3.6.1.4.1.11.2.46.2.2.0.100).  
Trap Format  
The PSA can generate three different traps:  
coldStart  
STATUS: current  
DESCRIPTION: A coldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, is reinitializing  
itself and that its configuration may have been altered.  
::= { snmpTraps 1 }  
trapTest  
OBJECTS: {snmpTrapTest}  
STATUS: current  
DESCRIPTION: When a set is done on trapTest this notification will be sent out.  
::= { psaEventV2 100 }  
logEventCriticalAlert  
OBJECTS: { logCriticalCategory, logCriticalID, logCriticalMessageNumeric, logCriticalMessageString }  
STATUS: current  
DESCRIPTION: When a new critical entry is added to the logTable a notification of this type will be sent to  
all entities registered for this notification.  
::= { psaEventV2 1 }  
This trap corresponds to critical entries in the Event Log. Six different events have been defined as critical:  
Cannot communicate with any domain controllers. Domain name:  
Cannot communicate with any WINS servers.  
Cannot communicate with any DNS servers.  
Cannot connect to printer-connection refused by printer.  
Cannot print due to problem at the printer.  
Critically high disk utilization - disk utilization is at 90-100% of capacity. If this log is added to the  
event log the following trap will be sent.  
logEventCriticalAlert notification received  
Community: public  
Bindings (6)  
#1: sysUpTime.0 0 days 00h:00m:32s.52th  
#2: snmpTrapOID.0 logEventCriticalAlert&nbsp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#3: logCriticalCategory administrative(3)  
#4: logCriticalID 110  
#5: logCriticalMessageNumeric NULL  
#6: logCriticalMessageString Critically high disk utilization - disk utilization is at 90-100% of  
capacity.  
SNMPv3  
The SNMPv3 RFCs do not specify a mechanism for creating the initial SNMPv3 account. The initial account creation  
is left to the developer. Users can create the initial account and add it to the PSA using one of two methods: using  
the web interface (covered in this document) or using SNMP (intended for use by other applications and not covered  
in this document).  
SNMPv3 security relies upon the creation of two separate keys: one for encryption and the other for authentication.  
The keys are hex strings. To make hex strings easy to remember, two different algorithms for turning passwords  
into keys were defined for use: HMAC-MD5-96 and HMAC-SHA-96. Once the key is generated from the passwords,  
the key can be localized to a specific SNMP agent by combining the key with the SNMP agent's engine ID and then  
by running a hashing algorithm on the combined pair. The following flowchart illustrates this.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Initial Account Creation Through the PSA's Web Interface  
Using the PSA's web interface, users can create an SNMPv3 account by supplying a user name, an authentication  
key, and a privacy key. The PSA will except either a localized or non-localized key, but not a password. This was  
done by design to maintain backward compatibility with other JetDirect products. How a user determines whether to  
use a localized or non-localized key largely depends upon the SNMP application that will be used to communicate  
with the PSA. If an SNMP application that is highly configurable such as "Mg-Soft Mib Browser" is being used, then a  
user can use a non-localized key. However, if the user is using a less configurable tool, such as the net-SNMP tools,  
the user may have to type a localized key that was generated from a password.  
Note: A valid key is 32-characters long and only contains the characters 0-9, a-f, and/or A-F.  
Initial Account Creation Using Passwords  
Since the PSA only accepts authentication keys, users must first convert their password to a key. Follow these steps  
to convert a password to a key:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Start the application KeyChange.exe that is supplied on the CD shipped with the PSA.  
2. Create the Authentication Key:  
a. In New Passphrase, type the password. Use the engine ID you wish to communicate with (on the  
SNMP Settings page in the web interface under Networking). Do not include the beginning "0x" which  
indicates the value is given in hexadecimal.  
b. Click Update New Key. This value, excluding "0x", is the authentication key. Copy this key (omitting the  
"0X") and paste it into the Authentication Key field on the SNMP Settings page (on the menu in the  
PSA's web interface under Networking).  
3. Create the Privacy Key:  
a. In New Passphrase, type the password. Use the engine ID you wish to communicate with(on the SNMP  
Settings page in the web interface under Networking). Do not include the beginning "0x" which indicates  
the value is given in hexadecimal.  
b. Click Update New Key. This value, excluding "0x", is the privacy key. Copy this key (omitting the "0X")  
and paste it into the Privacy Key field on the SNMP Settings page (on the menu in the PSA's web  
interface under Networking).  
4. Click  
.
Removing the SNMPv3 Account  
To remove the SNMPv3 account, uncheck the Enable SNMPv3 box and click  
. This will destroy all  
SNMPv3 accounts that have been created including accounts that were cloned from the original. It is also important  
to note that the SNMP agent's engine ID will change each time the SNMPv3 account is deleted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Print Shares  
Links within this page:  
Links to related pages:  
Print Shares Option  
After Print Shares is selected from the menu (in the web interface under Print Services), the Print Share List  
page is displayed. On this page, administrators can:  
Print Share List Page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Field  
Description  
Names  
Share  
Name  
Name of the print share as typed in the Print Share Name field on the Add Print Share page  
in the web interface. This name is displayed in Network Neighborhood or in My Network Places  
as an available print share configured on the PSA. The print share name can be up to 79  
characters long, including alphanumeric characters and the following special characters: _ - . ?.  
(Print share names longer than 12 characters might cause problems with Windows 9x and ME  
or MS-DOS clients. Various LPD implementations might also have length restrictions.)  
Status  
Status of the print share:  
Active  
Cannot be contacted (The printer cannot be found. It does not respond to a network  
query or ping.)  
Connected  
Disabled  
Door open  
Error  
Error-Printer Unknown  
Low paper  
Low toner  
LPD not supported  
No paper  
No toner  
Offline  
Online  
Paper jam  
Paused  
Service required  
Unknown state  
Jobs  
Number of print jobs waiting to be printed on the corresponding print share.  
Properties  
Displays the Properties page. Use this page to:  
display and/or modify the properties of a selected print share, including the print  
share's name, IP address, or description.  
pause and resume printing from the print share.  
print a test page.  
Driver  
Displays the Driver page on which the driver for the print share can be viewed or changed.  
Displays the Security page.  
Security  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Delete  
(Print Share)  
To delete a print share from the PSA, follow these steps:  
1. Find the print share to delete from the PSA and click  
on that same line.  
2. The message, "Are you sure you want to delete the print share and all of its print  
jobs?" is displayed.  
3. Click  
. The selected print share and all of its print jobs will be deleted.  
Adding a Print Share to the PSA  
While there is no fixed limit on the number of print shares that can be attached to the PSA, many factors impact  
performance in your environment and create an effective limit for your environment and use model. Factors that  
impact performance include the number of users printing through the PSA, how frequently the users print, whether  
NT Domain security is enabled, the size of the jobs being printed, the types of jobs being printed (for example, color  
print jobs), the speed of your printer(s), and how many print shares are installed on the PSA.  
Both UNIX and Windows clients can simultaneously print to the same print share. UNIX clients ignore any Windows  
driver selections.  
The following postscript printer drivers for Windows 9x and NT are factory-installed. These drivers, and any others  
that have been added to the PSA, can be associated with a print share on the PSA. The HP LaserJet 4 has both the  
postscript and PCL drivers installed; the default is the PCL driver.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note: When upgrading to 2.5.x, drivers that were installed prior to the upgrade will be available.  
HP Business Inkjet Printers  
HP Business Inkjet 2280 series printers  
HP Color LaserJet Printers  
HP Color LaserJet 2500 series printers  
HP Color LaserJet 4500 series printers  
HP Color LaserJet 4550 series printers  
HP Color LaserJet 4600 series printers  
HP LaserJet Printers  
HP Business Inkjet 3000 series printers  
HP Color LaserJet 5500 series printers  
HP Color LaserJet 8500 series printers  
HP Color LaserJet 8550 series printers  
HP LaserJet 4 series printers  
HP LaserJet 4050 series printers  
HP LaserJet 4100 series printers  
HP LaserJet 4200 series printers  
HP LaserJet 4300 series printers  
HP LaserJet 5000 series printers  
HP LaserJet 5100 series printers  
HP LaserJet 8000 series printers  
HP LaserJet 8100 series printers  
HP LaserJet 8150 series printers  
HP LaserJet 9000 series printers  
HP LaserJet 4/4M Plus printer  
HP LaserJet 4Si printer  
HP LaserJet 4V printer  
HP LaserJet 5/5M series printers  
HP LaserJet 5Si series printers  
HP LaserJet 6P/6MP series printers  
HP LaserJet 2100 series printers  
HP LaserJet 3300 series printers  
HP LaserJet 4000 series printers  
To add a print share, see the next section.  
Note: If Domain Authentication is enabled (on the Microsoft Network Settings page), the administrator must  
either have a local account on the PSA with the same user name and password as their domain account, or a  
domain account for the administrator must be added to the PSA. If Domain Authentication is not enabled, the  
administrator logged onto the PC must have a local administrator account with the same name and password as  
their domain account.  
Adding a Printer to the PSA, or Using the Add Print Share Wizard  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
While there is no fixed limit on the number of printers that can be attached to the PSA, many factors impact  
performance in your environment and create an effective limit for your environment and use model. Factors that  
impact performance include the number of users printing through the PSA, how frequently the users print, whether  
NT Domain security is enabled, the size of the jobs being printed, the types of jobs being printed (for example, color  
print jobs), and how many printers are installed on the PSA.  
Both UNIX and Windows clients can simultaneously print to the same printer. UNIX clients ignore any Windows  
driver selections.  
Numerous printer drivers are factory-installed. Click here to see a list of those drivers.  
To add a printer, follow these steps:  
Note: If Domain Authentication is not enabled (on the Microsoft Networking Settings page), the administrator  
logged onto the PC must have a local administrator account with the same name and password as their domain  
account. If Domain Authentication is enabled, the administrator must either have a local account on the PSA with  
the same user name and password as their domain account, or a domain account for the administrator must be  
added to the PSA.  
1. Select Print Shares (in the web interface under Print Services).  
2. Click  
. The Add Print Share wizard will be launched.  
Add Print Share (Step 1 of 3): Type the IP address or hostname and the network connection for  
the print share being added.  
Add Print Share (Step 1 of 3) Page  
Field Names  
Description  
IP Address or Hostname  
DNS name or IP address of the network printer that will be  
servicing the print jobs in this queue (for example, hpprinter.  
mycomputer.com or 192.0.0.192) . In order to use the DNS  
name, a DNS server address must be configured on the PSA in  
the TCP/IP and DNS Settings page.  
The name must be alphanumeric and can contain hyphens ( - )  
and periods (.).  
Printer Network Connection:  
HP Jetdirect internal card or single-port external box:  
Select this if the printer has an internal HP Jetdirect print  
server card, or is connected to an external single-port  
HP Jetdirect print server.  
HP Jetdirect 3-port external box: Some external HP print  
servers support more than one printer (for example, the  
HP Jetdirect 500X). For these cases, choose which port  
the printer is connected to.  
Other print server: Select this option if the target print  
server is not an HP Jetdirect print server. Many print  
servers will work with the default selections of Hewlett-  
Packard Jetdirect Print Server selected. If, however, the  
print jobs do not appear on the printer, select this option  
and complete Remote Queue Name with the remote  
queue name recommended by the print server  
manufacturer. This field is case-sensitive. Refer to the  
lpr or UNIX printing section of the print server manual.  
(For example, Xerox printers use a remote queue name  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
of "LP" (and not "lp") while other manufacturer of print  
servers or systems administrators may choose different  
names. )  
Add Print Share (Step 2 of 3): Type the print share name and description.  
Add Print Share (Step 2 of 3) Page  
Description  
Field Names  
Print Share  
Name  
The print share name is displayed in Network Neighborhood or in My  
Network Places as a print share configured on the PSA.  
It can be up to 79 characters long, including alphanumeric characters and  
the following special characters: _ - + , .  
(Print share names longer than 12 characters might cause problems with  
Windows 9x and ME or MS-DOS clients. Various LPD implementations might  
Print Share  
Description  
(optional)  
Description of the print share.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hide this  
print share in  
Network  
Neighborhood  
and My  
Select this option to hide this print share's name in Network Neighborhood  
or in My Network Places for clients. (This does not prevent the print share  
from being used, just from being displayed in Network Neighborhood or in  
My Network Places.)  
Network  
Places  
Print a  
Select this option to insert a banner page at the beginning of each print job.  
(The contents of the banner page are not configurable.)  
banner page  
with each  
print job  
Add Print Share (Step 3 of 3) :  
Add Print Share (Step 3 of 3) Page  
Field  
Description  
Names  
Client  
Printer  
Driver  
Displays all printer drivers currently installed on the PSA, and highlights the  
driver currently associated with the specified printer. To change the driver for the  
printer, highlight a different driver and click  
. Or, add a new driver by  
clicking on this page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Client  
Side  
Do not select this option unless you are having problems with your W2K drivers  
working properly. Symptoms include trouble with:  
Rendering  
N-up (printing multiple pages in a reduced format on one page)  
booklet style (format the print job into a printed booklet)  
watermark (print a watermark on each page of the document)  
ZoomSmart (scales a letter-sized/A4 document or poster to tabloid/A3,  
or vice versa)  
back-to-front (prints the document in reverse order)  
rotate 180 degrees (rotates the document layout but not the paper)  
If you are having problems with any of these features, first update the firmware.  
If the problem persists, reinstall the driver and select the "Use client side  
rendering with this driver" checkbox when selecting the driver to use with the  
print share. The problem should then be resolved.  
Select the printer driver for the print share being added. The Print Share List will be displayed. If  
the driver is displayed in the Client Printer Driver field, click  
.
To use the CSR compatible driver for 2K and XP clients only, click on Use client side rendering  
with this driver.  
Note: NT clients will not be able to use this print share if a CSR driver is attached to this share.  
If the printer driver for the print share is not displayed in the drop-down list on this page, click  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
. A security warning is displayed. Click Yes to continue and then follow the steps to  
add the printer driver and associate it with the print share just added.  
Note: After the PSA has been configured and drivers have been associated with print shares, the configuration  
should be backed up.  
Note: Having Windows 2000/XP versions and NT versions of drivers with the same names installed on a PSA can  
result in the loss of printer settings and functionality (e.g., inability to print in landscape mode or loss of  
watermarks). To eliminate this risk of lost printer functionality, HP recommends two workarounds:  
1. Install and distribute only NT printer drivers on the PSA for all of the NT, 2K, and XP clients; or  
2. If print shares for both driver versions are required, create a separate share for each driver type on  
separate PSAs. This only affects NT and 2K/XP printer drivers and not 9X drivers. 9X drivers can still be  
installed along with NT or 2000/XP drivers.  
For more information, please refer to the white papers on client migration from NT to 2K/XP clients (http://www.hp.  
Viewing and Managing Print Jobs  
Use the Print Jobs page to view the jobs for a selected print share:  
Print Jobs Page  
Field Names  
File Name  
Status  
Description  
Name of the file(s) or print job(s) for this print share.  
Status of the print job:  
Printing: currently printing on the print share.  
Paused: user paused the print job.  
Spooling: job is being spooled to the PSA by a client.  
Queued: job is queued and is waiting to be printed.  
Unknown: error occurred; unknown status (the user should delete the print job with  
this status).  
User  
Date  
Size  
Name of the client user who submitted each print job.  
Date the print job was sent.  
Size of the print job (in bytes).  
Delete  
Delete this specific print job.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To manage print jobs for a print share, follow these steps:  
1. Select Print Shares (in the web interface under Print Services). The Print Share List page is displayed.  
2. Find the appropriate print share and click in the Jobs column for that print share. The Print Jobs page is  
displayed.  
3. To delete a print job, click  
on the line for the print job. Or click  
to delete all jobs  
(as displayed) for the print share.  
4. Click refresh to update the page or click  
to return to the Print Share List page.  
Print Share Properties  
The Print Share Properties page is displayed when Properties is selected for a specific print share on the Print  
Share List page. Use the Properties page to:  
display and/or modify the properties of a selected print share, including the print share's name, printer's IP  
address, or description  
pause and resume printing from the print share  
print a test page  
Properties Page  
Field Names  
Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Print Share Description (optional)  
Description of the print share.  
Hide this print share in Network  
Neighborhood or My Network Places  
Select this to hide this print share's name in Network  
Neighborhood or in My Network Places for clients. (This does not  
prevent the print share from being used, just from being  
displayed in Network Neighborhood or in My Network Places.)  
Print a banner page with each print job  
Pause printing from this print share  
Printer IP Address or host name  
Select this to print a banner page preceding every print job.  
(The contents of the banner page are not configurable.)  
Check this box to pause printing from this print share. To  
resume printing from this print share, clear this box.  
IP address or host name of the printer that will be servicing the  
print jobs in this queue. This may be the DNS name or the IP  
address of the network printer (for example,  
hpprint share.mycomputer.com or 192.0.0.192) . In order to  
use the DNS name, a DNS server address must be configured on  
the PSA in the Microsoft Network Settings page (in the web  
interface under Print Services).  
The name must be alphanumeric and can contain hyphens ( - ).  
Printer Network Connector  
HP Jetdirect internal card or single-port external box:  
Select this if the printer has an internal HP Jetdirect print  
server card, or is connected to an external single-port  
HP Jetdirect print server.  
HP Jetdirect 3-port external box: Some external HP print  
servers support more than one printer (for example, the  
HP Jetdirect 500X). For these cases, choose the port to  
which the printer is connected.  
Other print server: Select this option if the target print  
server is not an HP Jetdirect print server. Many print  
servers will work well with the default selections of  
Hewlett-Packard Jetdirect Print Server. If, however, the  
print jobs do not appear on the printer, select this option  
and complete Remote Queue Name with the remote  
queue name recommended by the print server  
manufacturer. Refer to the lpr or UNIX printing section  
of the print server manual. (For example, Xerox printers  
use a remote queue name of "LP".)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To make any changes to this page, follow these steps.  
1. Select Print Share (in the web interface under Print Services).  
2. Click  
for the print share.  
3. If desired, make any changes to the print share's properties.  
4. If desired, click to print a test page.  
5. Click . The Print Share List page is displayed again.  
Printer Driver Page  
The Driver page is displayed when Drivers is selected for a specific print share on the Print Share List page.  
The Drivers page displays all printer drivers that are installed on the PSA. A different printer driver can be selected  
in the list of installed drivers for the specified print share. (See also Printer Driver Management.) The print share  
name is displayed at the top of the Drivers page. This is the name of the print share as typed in the Print Share  
Name field on the Add Print Share page in the web interface. This name is displayed in Network Neighborhood or  
in My Network Places as an available print share configured on the PSA.  
Drivers Page  
Field Name  
Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Client Printer Driver  
Client Side Rendering  
Displays all printer drivers added to the PSA, and highlights the driver currently  
associated with the specified print share. To change the driver for the print share,  
highlight a different driver and click  
.
Do not select this option unless you are having problems with your W2K drivers  
working properly. Symptoms include trouble with:  
N-up (printing multiple pages in a reduced format on one page)  
booklet style (format the print job into a printed booklet)  
watermark (print a watermark on each page of the document)  
ZoomSmart (scales a letter-sized/A4 document or poster to tabloid/A3, or  
vice versa)  
back-to-front (prints the document in reverse order)  
rotate 180 degrees (rotates the document layout but not the paper)  
If you are having problems with any of these features, first update the firmware. If  
the problem persists, reinstall the driver and select "Client side rendering" on this  
page. The problem should then be resolved.  
Print Share Security Page  
The Print Share Security page is displayed when Security is selected for a specific print share on the Print  
Share List page. The Print Share Security page shows print share security information if NT Domain security is  
enabled (an NT domain is specified on the Microsoft Network Settings page).  
Note: Microsoft Windows 2000 and XP permissions that do not map directly to the four access levels of Windows NT  
(Print, Manage, Full Control, and No Access) appear as "Special Access".  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Print Share Security Page  
Description  
Field Name  
Type account name  
Select accounts from  
Type the account name in the format Domain\Accountname.  
This drop-down list contains names of the primary domain and all trusted  
domains. Select one from which to select accounts.  
Shows all of the NT groups on the domain specified in the above field. To show  
Domain Members  
users also, click  
.
Highlight the group or user and click  
. The user or group will be  
added to the list shown under Current Account(s) in List with the level of  
access indicated in parentheses.  
(To highlight multiple groups/users, use the Control or Shift key.)  
Note: If the domain has its anonymous enumeration of SAM accounts security  
policy set to "disabled", the web interface will ask for a user name and password  
so it can retrieve the group or user list. The name and password is not saved on  
the PSA, so subsequent requests for browse lists will ask for the name and  
password again.  
Select Access Type  
Lists possible access rights that can be assigned to users and/or groups. Highlight  
the desired access level and it will be applied to any accounts added when clicking  
. Valid access types are:  
Print (print, pause, and delete your own print jobs)  
Manage Documents (print, pause, and delete other user's print jobs)  
Full Control (print, pause, and delete other user's print jobs, delete print  
shares, and change security settings (using native NT tools))  
No Access (the user will be denied access even if permitted access under  
another entry)  
Special Access (for some Windows 2000 and XP permissions that do not  
map directly to the above four permission levels)  
Current Accounts in List  
Lists all groups and/or users with their access rights.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer Driver Management  
Links within this page:  
Links to related pages:  
Printer drivers are factory-installed, or they might already be loaded from a previously-added printer. All printer  
drivers added to the PSA are displayed on the Driver Management page. Drivers can also be initialized or deleted  
on this page.  
Note: Client-side rendering (CSR) drivers and Windows 2000 drivers can be initialized, enabled, and disabled  
separately. However, these drivers are installed and deleted at the same time.  
Note: Drivers for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 usually work with both Windows 2000 and Windows XP. Consequently,  
many vendors will label a driver as Windows 2000 or XP when the driver conforms to the NT 4.0 driver specification.  
As a result, any of the following can occur.  
Windows 2000 drivers can show up as Windows NT or Windows 2000 drivers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Windows NT drivers show up as Windows NT drivers.  
Windows XP drivers show up as Windows NT or Windows 2000 drivers.  
Note: Having Windows 2000/XP versions and NT versions of drivers with the same names installed on a PSA can  
result in the loss of printer settings and functionality (e.g., inability to print in landscape mode or loss of  
watermarks). To eliminate this risk of lost printer functionality, HP recommends two workarounds:  
1. Install and distribute only NT printer drivers on the PSA for all of the NT, 2K, and XP clients; or  
2. If print shares for both driver versions are required, create a separate share for each driver type on  
separate PSAs. This only affects NT and 2K/XP printer drivers and not 9X drivers. 9X drivers can still be  
installed along with NT or 2000/XP drivers.  
For more information, please refer to the white papers on client migration from NT to 2K/XP clients (http://www.hp.  
Driver Management Page  
Field Name  
Description  
Specify an operating system to display printer drivers for that operating  
system only. Or, select All Operating Systems to display all printer  
drivers installed on the PSA.  
Shows installed printer drivers  
for  
Printer Drivers  
List the printer drivers for the operating system specified above, or lists  
all printer drivers if All Operating Systems is chosen.  
Each driver can have only one name (the same as in the .ini file)  
regardless of the number or type of printers associated with it.  
If a driver is displayed in blue and preceded with a "~" (tilde), that  
driver has been disabled either by the user (to prevent it from being  
used) or by the system (in the case that it failed to initialize during its  
installation). When a driver is disabled, it can be associated with a  
printer but will not be downloaded to a client PC for point and print. (The  
user will be prompted to install a driver locally.) When a client connects  
to a print share with a disabled driver, it receives the name of the driver  
to install and a prompt requesting that the driver be installed.  
If the administrator enables the driver, it will be available to clients  
through point and print if the client connects to a print share associated  
with that driver.  
To enable a driver:  
If the driver was disabled by the user, click  
. The  
driver can now be downloaded to a client's PC for point and print.  
If the driver had been disabled by the system due to a failure  
during driver initialization, the administrator cannot enable this  
driver until it is successfully initialized. (A failure might be  
attributed to file corruption.) To initialize the driver, first try  
installing the printer again. When asked for a printer driver,  
consider using a different source for the printer driver in case the  
original file was corrupted. If a driver is disabled by the system,  
it must be installed again for it to be enabled (use the Add Driver  
wizard to install the driver again.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the driver persistently fails to initialize then the printer created  
can still be used, but when clients connect to that printer they  
will be prompted to install the driver files for that driver locally.  
The end user will be required to provide driver files for a driver  
whose name matches the name of the driver associated with the  
printer on the PSA.  
Note: Having Windows 2000/XP versions and NT versions of drivers with  
the same names installed on a PSA can result in the loss of printer  
settings and functionality (e.g., inability to print in landscape mode or  
loss of watermarks). To eliminate this risk of lost printer functionality,  
HP recommends two workarounds:  
1. Install and distribute only NT printer drivers on the PSA for all of  
the NT, 2K, and XP clients; or  
2. If print shares for both driver versions are required, create a  
separate share for each driver type on separate PSAs. This only  
affects NT and 2K/XP printer drivers and not 9X drivers. 9X  
drivers can still be installed along with NT or 2000/XP drivers.  
For more information, please refer to the white papers on client  
migration from NT to 2K/XP clients (http://www.hp.com/go/  
To initialize or reset drivers that are already installed on the PSA,  
highlight the driver and click Initialize.  
Client side rendering (CSR) is a process built into a new architecture of  
printer drivers for 2K and XP clients called Unidriver. If the printer driver  
you are installing is a Unidriver and you are having problems with any if  
the following advanced printing features then use the CSR version of the  
printer driver to see if it resolves your printing problems.  
N-up (printing multiple pages in a reduced format on one page)  
booklet style (format the print job into a printed booklet)  
watermark (print a watermark on each page of the document)  
ZoomSmart (scales a letter-sized/A4 document or poster to  
tabloid/A3, or vice versa)  
Client side rendering  
back-to-front (prints the document in reverse order)  
rotate 180 degrees (rotates the document layout but not the  
paper)  
To see client side rendering drivers, select this option.  
Note: Print queues using the CSR driver are not compatible with NT  
clients.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. To access the Driver Management page, select Driver Management (in the web interface under Print  
Services).  
2. Select the operating system for the driver(s) to be viewed or deleted (or select All Operating Systems).  
The corresponding drivers are displayed in the Printer Drivers list box.  
3. If desired, highlight the printer driver to delete, enable, initialize, or disable and click the corresponding  
button.  
Note: The HP LaserJet 4 printer driver can never be deleted.  
4. Then click the appropriate button on the right.  
If adding a driver, a security warning is displayed. Click Yes to continue and then the Add Printer Driver  
wizard is displayed.  
Adding New Drivers to the PSA, or Using the Add Driver Wizard  
Links within this page:  
Links to related pages:  
Printer drivers are factory-installed, or they might already be loaded from a previously-added printer. While these  
will cover many needs, other drivers may be required. This section discusses the procedure for adding drivers to the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PSA.  
Note: After the PSA has been configured and drivers have been associated with printers, the configuration should  
be backed up.  
Adding a New Printer Driver  
To add a driver to the PSA, click  
on the Driver Management page. The New Printer Driver (Step 1  
of 3) page is displayed. This page can also be accessed by clicking  
Note: Before drivers can be initialized, Java Scripting must be enabled (in Internet Explorer, under: Internet  
Options-->Security (tab)-->Custom Level (button)-->Scripting-->Scripting of Java Applets (subheading). If a Java  
virtual machine is not installed in the browser, refer to Sun Microsystem's web site or to Microsoft's web site for  
information about downloading one.  
New Printer Driver (Step 1 of 3):  
New Printer Driver (Step 1 of 3)  
Description  
Field Name  
Driver setup information file  
Type the path for the printer driver, or click the Browse button.  
Note: An XP, 2K, or NT driver must be added before a 9x driver can  
be added.  
Supported operating system  
Specify the operating system for the driver being added.  
Note: The driver's operating system specified must never be newer  
than the operating system of the PC you are working from. For  
example, if you are working from an NT system, you can only add NT  
and 9x drivers. If you are working from an XP system, you can add  
XP, 2K, NT, and 9x drivers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
New Printer Driver page (Step 2 of 3):  
New Printer Driver (Step 2 of 3)  
Field Name  
Drivers  
Description  
Highlight the driver to install and click  
.
Note: An XP, 2K, or NT driver must be added before a 9x driver can be added.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
New Printer Driver page (Step 3 of 3):  
New Printer Driver (Step 3 of 3)  
Field Name  
Description  
Install a driver  
Select additional printer drivers to install. Additional printer drivers can be installed  
for the client OS or any previous version of the OS. For example, if the client OS is  
XP, drivers for 2K, NT, or 9x can be installed. If the client OS is NT, only drivers for  
NT and 9x can be installed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If no duplicate drivers were found during installation, the Installing Printer Drivers page is displayed. If,  
during installation, a duplicate driver has been found, you can either replace or keep the existing one.  
Installing Printer Drivers page  
While the drivers selected are being installed and initialized, this screen displays the status of each step. If a  
driver has two versions being added (one for client side rendering), then these messages will appear twice.  
The final status indicates the status of the driver for the client OS. If the driver you are installing is a  
Unidriver, you will see the file copy screen appear twice and initialize screen appear only once; this is  
normal operation. If initialization fails, the driver is displayed on the Driver Management page as disabled.  
This means that driver cannot be downloaded to client PCs for point and print. To try initializing the driver  
again, you must add the driver again through the Driver Management page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
After the final status is displayed, click OK.  
Driver Name Mismatch  
When installing drivers for multiple operating systems, it is possible that the driver names do not match. Several  
scenarios and suggestions are possible:  
Scenario  
Resolution  
Windows 2000 and XP drivers will Add the same printer to the PSA twice: once with the Windows NT driver.  
not have the same name as a  
Windows NT driver  
Then add the printer again (with a different name) with a Windows 2000 or  
XP driver.  
Windows 2000 and XP or NT  
drivers does not have the same  
name as a Windows 9x driver  
The PSA displays the Driver Name Mismatch dialog; you will then be able to  
install the Windows 9x driver using the Windows 2000/XP or the NT as the  
display name. This will allow the 9x drivers to become point-and-print capable.  
Note: Having Windows 2000/XP versions and NT versions of drivers with the same names installed on a PSA can  
result in the loss of printer settings and functionality (e.g., inability to print in landscape mode or loss of  
watermarks). To eliminate this risk of lost printer functionality, HP recommends two workarounds:  
1. Install and distribute only NT printer drivers on the PSA for all of the NT, 2K, and XP clients; or  
2. If print shares for both driver versions are required, create a separate share for each driver type on  
separate PSAs. This only affects NT and 2K/XP printer drivers and not 9X drivers. 9X drivers can still be  
installed along with NT or 2000/XP drivers.  
For more information, please refer to the white papers on client migration from NT to 2K/XP clients (http://www.hp.  
Security Warning When Adding New Drivers  
In order to add new printer drivers to the PSA, either through the Add Print Share wizard or through the Driver  
Management page, executable files must be copied through the web browser onto the client PC.  
The following security warning is displayed and must be accepted for these executable files to be downloaded.  
These files will be used to initialize printer drivers, which is an integral part of adding printer drivers to the PSA. If  
you choose not to accept this security warning, you will not be able to add printer drivers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Administrator Account  
Links within this page:  
Links to related pages:  
Administrator Accounts  
Use the Administrators page to change passwords or add account names for local and domain administrator  
accounts. There can be multiple administrator accounts for the PSA, but all accounts have the same privileges.  
There must always be at least one local administrator account on the PSA.  
Note: The administrator account names and passwords are not related to the front panel password of the PSA,  
which is set and changed through the front panel.  
Caution: If all local administrator passwords are forgotten, the only way to gain access to the PSA through a local  
administrator account is to reset the PSA to factory defaults (using the front panel). After the PSA is reset to factory  
defaults, all configuration information will be lost including network settings and printers, and the PSA will possibly  
revert to a previous version of the firmware.  
To access the Administrators page, follow these steps:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Log on to the web interface. (The default is "admin" for the user name and "admin" for the password.)  
2. On the menu under Security, click Administrators. The Administrators page is displayed:  
Administrators Page  
Page Field  
Names  
Description  
Lists all local administrator accounts added to the PSA. Local accounts are stored on the  
PSA and are independent from domain accounts.  
Lists all domain administrator accounts added to the PSA.  
Local Administrator Accounts  
There must always be at least one local administrator account on the PSA. When an administrator accesses the PSA  
using a local account, an administrator name and password must be supplied for the PSA. (This user name and  
password are passed over the network in cleartext; HP recommends accessing the PSA over SSL (HTTPS) to protect  
the confidentiality of information like passwords.) Local administrator accounts can be added, deleted, or their  
passwords can be changed through the Administrators page.  
Note: In order to use NT native tools without NT domain authentication enabled (on the Microsoft Network Settings  
page), the administrator logged onto the PC must have a local administrator account with the same name and  
password as the domain account.  
Adding a Local Administrator Account  
New Local Administrator  
Page Field Names  
Description  
Administrator Name  
Type the new administrator name (must be unique for the PSA). The administrator  
name is case-sensitive and can contain up to 20 alphanumeric characters and/or the  
following special characters:  
~ ` ! @ $ % ^ ( ) - _ { } .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Password  
Type the password. The password is case-sensitive and can contain up to 14  
alphanumeric characters and/or the following special characters:  
~ ` ! $ % ^ ( ) - _ { } .  
Note: The PSA will accept a null or blank password.  
Confirm Password  
Type the password again to confirm it (if there is a password). Then click  
add this administrator to the PSA.  
to  
In addition to the default local administrator account, other administrator accounts can be to the PSA. To add an  
administrator account, follow these steps:  
1. Log on to the web interface.  
2. On the menu under Security, click Administrators. The Administrators page is displayed.  
3. Click  
under the list of local administrators. The New Local Administrator page is displayed.  
4. Complete the fields as described below.  
5. Click . The message "Administrator Account Added" is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting a Local Administrator Account  
Administrator accounts can be deleted from the PSA, but there always must be at least one administrator account  
remaining on the PSA. Follow these steps to delete an administrator account:  
1. Log on to the web interface.  
2. On the menu under Security, click Administrators. The Administrators page is displayed.  
3. Highlight the local administrator account to delete.  
4. Click  
deleted.)  
to delete the administrator account. (If this is the only administrator account, it cannot be  
Changing the Password for an Existing Local Administrator Account  
The password for an existing local administrator account can be changed through the the Administrators page.  
Follow these steps to change a password for an administrator account:  
1. Log on to the web interface.  
2. On the menu under Security, click Administrators. The Administrators page is displayed.  
3. Highlight the local administrator account for which the password is changing.  
4. Click  
. The Local Administrator Password page is displayed.  
5. Type the new password in the New Password field.  
6. Repeat the password in the Confirm New Password field.  
7. Click  
. The Administrators page will be displayed.  
Once the administrator account name and password have been changed, the current browser session is no longer  
authenticated and you will be prompted to re-enter your password. Re-connect to the PSA, using the new  
administrator account name and password.  
Note: Local administrator accounts on the PSA cannot be renamed. If necessary, delete the local account and then  
add it with its new administrator name.  
Local Administrator Password  
Page Field Names  
Description  
Administrator Name  
Displays the administrator name.  
Password  
Type the password. The password is case-sensitive and can contain alphanumeric  
characters and the following special characters:  
~ ` ! @ $ % ^ ( ) - _ { } .  
Note: The PSA will accept a null or blank password.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Confirm Password  
Type the password again to confirm it (if there is a password). Then click  
add this administrator to the PSA.  
to  
Domain Administrator Accounts  
If Domain Authentication is enabled on the Microsoft Network Settings page, administrators can be identified by  
their Microsoft domain account. A list of domain user or group accounts can be configured in the PSA. This list is  
similar to the entries in the Administrators group of a Windows member server.  
When administrators access the PSA, they can provide their domain identity (see Single Sign-On below). If the  
name provided matches an entry in the Domain Administrators list, or if they are a member of a domain group in  
the list, they will be allowed access to the PSA management interface.  
Note: When there is a Local Administrator account name that is the same as an account name in the Domain  
Administrators list, the PSA will first attempt to authenticate the domain account first (see Single Sign-On and Basic  
Authentication below). If the password given does not match the domain account, the PSA will perform Basic  
Authentication with the local administrator account.  
Adding a Domain Administrator Account  
To add a domain administrator account, follow these steps:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Log on to the web interface.  
2. On the menu under Security, click Administrators. The Administrators page is displayed.  
3. Click  
page is displayed.  
4. Complete the fields as described below.  
under the list of domain administrators. The Administrator-Add Domain Accounts  
5. Click  
. The message "Administrator Account Added" is displayed.  
Admin Accounts - Domain Accounts Page  
Description  
Field Name  
Type Account Name  
Type the account name for the domain in the format Domain  
\Accountname.  
Select Account(s) from  
Domain Members  
The drop-down list contains names of the primary domain and all  
trusted domains.  
Shows all of the members in the domain specified in the above field.  
To show users also, click  
.
(To highlight multiple groups/users, use the Control or Shift key.)  
Accounts to add as Administrators  
Lists all groups and/or users with administrator rights for the PSA.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: If the Domain Controller is not available, administrators can use their local account.  
When browsing for domain accounts from the Select Account(s) from list of domains, the PSA may ask for a user  
name and password. The reason is the domain's security policy requires a trusted user account to connect to the  
domain controller to retrieve the account list. A machine account (i.e. the PSA's) is not sufficient when the domain  
is configured to protect enumeration of users and groups account information.  
Single Sign-On (SSO)  
Single Sign-On allows an administrator, using Internet Explorer, to access the PSA without prompting for an  
account name and password. The PSA will request the browser to provide credentials given when the administrator  
logged into the Windows workstation. The following scenarios could occur:  
1. When an administrator is using Internet Explorer and the URL specified for the PSA is within the browser’s  
local intranet zone, the browser will automatically send the credentials used to log into the Windows  
workstation.  
If the credentials are successfully authenticated with a domain controller and the administrators are  
also authorized to access the PSA's web interface, then the requested page will be served to the  
browser. Administrators are authorized if their domain account is listed in the PSA Domain  
If the credentials are not authenticated with a domain controller or the administrator's account is  
not authorized to access the PSA, the PSA will prompt for another account name and password (see  
2. If the PSA administrator is using Internet Explorer but the URL used to access the PSA is not within the local  
intranet, then the administrator will be prompted for account name and password. In this case, the security  
prompt given to the administrator will have three fields and the information entered here will be encrypted  
before being passed to the PSA (the screen shown is for Microsoft Windows NT 4.x; this screen might vary  
depending on your operating system).  
After the name, password, and domain or entered the process is as (1) above.  
3. If the administrator is not using Internet Explorer the browser will use the ‘Basic Authentication’ protocol.  
Basic Authentication  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
If an administrator uses a browser other than Internet Explorer, SSO will not be supported; the browser will  
communicate with the PSA through Basic security and all security information will be passed to the PSA in cleartext.  
The administrator will be prompted with a Basic security password prompt having two fields and can then either  
choose to use a local administrator account user name and password, or specify a domain user name and password  
where the user name includes the domain name (for example, domainname\user name). In the latter case, a user  
with a domain administrator account on the PSA can access the web interface through a Basic security prompt  
without having a local administrator account. (However, this user name and password are passed in cleartext.) (The  
screen shown is for Microsoft Windows NT 4.x; this screen might vary depending on your operating system.)  
Configuring Internet Explorer  
By default, URLs (including IP addresses) with periods in the name (for example, http//www.hp.com and  
http://10.0.0.1) or URLs that go through a proxy server are not included in a browser's local intranet. An  
administrator can view or change their local intranet settings in the Internet Options page under the Security tab  
by selecting Local Intranet and clicking on the Sites button.  
In order to have SSO work with IP addresses, the proxy must be bypassed for that IP address; type the IP address  
under Tools-->Options-->Connections-->Proxy Server-->Advanced-->Exceptions. Also, under Security-->Sites,  
select Include all sites that bypass the proxy server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSL  
Links within this page:  
Links to related pages:  
SSL Certificates  
SSL/TLS secures the PSA's web interface by providing data privacy, data integrity, and server authentication. SSL/  
TLS (Secure Sockets Layer (SSL v2/v3) and Transport Layer Security (TLS v1)) is based upon the exchange of  
certificates that are used to validate a public key. These public keys are then used to generate a shared secret key  
that is used for encryption and decryption. Encrypting the data before it is sent out over the network and decrypting  
the data when it has been retrieved from the network provides data privacy.  
SSL/TLS is always enabled on the PSA. By default, a certificate is automatically created and installed on the PSA. To  
create a newer certificate on the PSA, the administrator must provide data to create a key pair and certificate. The  
PSA's web interface always listens on the secure data channel (Port 443, HTTPS) and on the unsecure data channel  
(Port 80). All transactions between the web browser and the PSA's web interface requiring security take place on  
this secure port.  
SSL Certificate Page  
The SSL Certificate page is displayed when SSL Certificate is selected (on the menu under Security).  
SSL Certificate Page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Field Names  
Description  
Installed  
Certificate  
Type  
Type of certificate installed (self-signed or CA signed).  
New  
Status of the certificate (installed or pending).  
Certificate  
Status  
Encryption  
strength  
Low, Medium, or High.  
Encrypt all  
web  
Select this to redirect all communication through a secure port (HTTPS).  
communication  
on the SSL Certificate page.  
To change the encryption strength or to encrypt web communication, follow these steps:  
1. At a workstation, access the web browser and type the IP address for the PSA.  
2. Log on to the PSA as an administrator. (The default user name is "admin" and the default password is  
"admin".)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Under Security on the menu, select SSL Certificate. (See the description of the fields above for more  
information.)  
4. Click on the Encryption strength drop-down list and select the cipher value for the certificate (Low  
(default), Medium, or High).  
5. To redirect all communication through a secure port (HTTPS), check Encrypt all web communication.  
6. Click  
.
Viewing the SSL Certificate  
The View Certificate page is displayed after  
is clicked on the SSL Certificate page.  
View Certificate Page  
Field Names  
Description  
Common Name  
Fully qualified domain name or IP Address of the PSA. Used to identify the device HPX595.  
rose.hp.com.  
Organization  
Full legal name of your company.  
Organizational  
Unit  
Specific department or division within your organization.  
Validity Period  
Cipher Value  
Locality (City)  
Length of time (in days) for validity of the certificate.  
Cipher value of the certificate (low, medium, or high).  
City in which your organization is physically located.  
State or province (up to 68 characters).  
State/  
Province  
Country/  
Region  
Two-character ISO country code.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Requesting a New Certificate  
The New Certificate page is displayed after  
is clicked on the SSL Certificate page. There are two  
options for a new certificate:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating a Self-Signed Certificate  
To create a new self-signed certificate, select the radio button for this option on the New Certificate page and click  
. The Self-Signed Certificate page is displayed.  
Self-Signed Certificate Page  
Field Names  
Description  
Common Name  
Fully qualified domain name or IP Address of the PSA. Used to identify the device HPX595.  
rose.hp.com.  
Organization  
Full legal name of your company.  
Organizational  
Unit  
Specific department or division within your organization.  
Validity Start  
Date  
The start date for the validity of the certificate.  
Validity Period  
(Days)  
Validity period for the certificate, in days. (The default is 365 days.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To create a new self-signed certificate, follow these steps:  
1. At a workstation, access the web browser and type the IP address for the PSA.  
2. Log on to the PSA as an administrator. (The default user name is "admin" and the default password is  
"admin".)  
3. Under Security on the menu, select SSL Certificate. (See the description of the fields above for more  
information.)  
4. Click  
.
5. Select the radio button for a self-signed certificate and click  
6. Complete the validity start date for the certificate.  
7. Complete the validity period for the certificate.  
.
8. Click  
.
Requesting a Signed Certificate from a Certificate Authority  
To request a signed certificate from a Certificate Authority, select the radio button for this option on the New  
Certificate page and click  
. The Request Signed Certificate page is displayed.  
Request Signed Certificate Page  
Field Names  
Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Common Name  
Organization  
Fully qualified domain name or IP Address of the PSA. Used to identify the device HPX595.  
rose.hp.com.  
Full legal name of your company.  
Organizational  
Unit  
Specific department or division within your organization.  
Locality (City)  
City in which your organization is physically located.  
State or province (up to 68 characters).  
State/  
Province  
Country/  
Region  
Two-character ISO country code.  
To request a signed certificate from a Certificate Authority, follow these steps:  
1. At a workstation, access the web browser and type the IP address for the PSA.  
2. Log on to the PSA as an administrator. (The default user name is "admin" and the default password is  
"admin".)  
3. Under Security on the menu, select SSL Certificate. (See the description of the fields above for more  
information.)  
4. Click  
.
5. Select the radio button for a certificate from a Certificate Authority and click  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Complete the fields on the Request Signed Certificate page (as described above).  
7. Click . The Certificate Request in PEM Encoding page is displayed.  
8. Follow the instructions on the page and click  
.
Installing a Certificate from a Certificate Authority  
After the signed certificate has been received from the Certificate Authority, follow these steps to install it:  
1. At a workstation, access the web browser and type the IP address for the PSA.  
2. Log on to the PSA as an administrator. (The default user name is "admin" and the default password is  
"admin".)  
3. Under Security on the menu, select SSL Certificate. (See the description of the fields above for more  
information.)  
4. Click  
. The Install Certificate page is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Cut and paste the text from the signed certificate into the text box displayed.  
6. Click  
. The web interface will restart and the new certificate will be valid.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Backing Up, Restoring, Reseting, Rebooting, and  
Upgrading the PSA  
Links within this page:  
Resetting the PSA to Factory Defaults (Using the Front Panel)  
Links to related pages:  
Backing Up Network Settings and Printer Information  
Saving the configuration parameters makes it easy to restore those parameters if the PSA must be replaced or if its  
configuration values are accidentally changed or lost. Use the Backup page to save the following configuration  
parameters:  
administrator account user names and passwords  
network settings  
printer information  
printer drivers  
Use the following procedure to save the configuration parameters:  
1. On the menu under Maintenance, select Backup.  
2. Click  
to begin the process. A File Download window appears.  
3. At the next screen, click Save This File to Disk and then click  
. A Save As dialog box appears.  
4. Choose a file name, drive, and directory to hold the saved configuration.  
5. Click  
. The saved configuration is in binary format and cannot be edited using a text editor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Now that there is a backup file for the PSA, settings can be restored if required (see the next section).  
Note: If the PSA is joined to a domain, the domain password for the domain controller is included in the backup  
file. When that PSA backup file is restored, it might be necessary to join the PSA to that domain again because the  
password might have changed since the backup file was created.  
Restoring Network Settings and Printer Information (Web Interface)  
If configuration values have been accidentally changed or lost, a previously saved copy of the configuration  
parameters can be restored to the PSA. This technique can also be used to replace a PSA. A copy of the  
configuration parameters is saved while the PSA's settings and files are being backed up.  
Use the following procedure to restore backup settings:  
1. On the menu under Maintenance, select Restore.  
2. Select the settings to restore:  
Administrator Accounts (restores all administrator accounts previously added and saved in the  
backup of the PSA)  
PSA Network Settings (restores all PSA address and name information)  
Printers and Printer Client Drivers: (restores all printer definitions and factory-installed drivers plus  
any added to the PSA for Microsoft's Point and Print feature)  
3. Type the full path and file name of the saved configuration in the Configuration File field. Or, click  
Browse to locate and select the file.  
4. Click  
-or-  
to begin the restore process.  
Click  
to return to the Restore page without restoring the configurations.  
5. The Restore Configuration Successful window appears. Click  
.
Resetting the PSA to Factory Defaults (Front Panel)  
Once the PSA is configured, the configuration settings are retained in memory unless they are manually reset to  
factory defaults through the front panel of the PSA. This procedure will reset the PSA to its factory defaults. All  
configuration information will be lost, including network settings, queues, and any firmware upgrades. The  
administrator account name and password will be reset to factory defaults.  
Note: If the PSA is reset to factory defaults, factory-installed drivers will be restored. All other settings (including  
network configuration, administrator settings, printers, and user-added drivers) will be lost.  
1. Make sure queues are empty and no printing activity is taking place.  
2. Press the Power button on the front panel of the PSA to turn it off.  
CAUTION: To prevent possible file corruption on the PSA, do not simply disconnect the power  
cord.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Turn on the PSA again by pressing the Power button.  
4. During the restart sequence, when the front panel display reads Configuring, press  
. The following  
message is displayed:  
5. Press  
to reset the PSA to its factory defaults. Press  
to cancel the restart process and retain all  
current configuration information. The PSA will then finish restarting.  
If  
was pressed and the factory default settings are being restored, the following message will be  
displayed during restart:  
Restarting (or Rebooting) the PSA  
Use the Restart feature to reboot the PSA. Before restarting the PSA, read the following:  
The restart process will take from three to six minutes. During this time, the PSA is not available for use  
and the connection to this browser session may be lost.  
Any print jobs actively being spooled from client users to the PSA will probably be lost and must be  
reprinted.  
Any print jobs currently spooled on the PSA will be retained.  
Any print jobs currently being de-spooled from the PSA to the printers may be restarted (automatically)  
once the PSA is ready to function.  
Follow these steps to restart the PSA:  
1. On the menu under Maintenance, click Restart.  
2. Click  
to begin the reboot process.  
Upgrading the Firmware on the PSA  
Before installing an upgrade, save the current configuration of the PSA using the Backup feature. One firmware  
version 2.3.x (and not earlier versions) can be upgraded to firmware version 2.4.x.  
CAUTION: This information should be automatically saved on the PSA, but if a catastrophic event occurs during the  
upgrade (for example, a power failure), it is possible that the configuration may be lost. This step is precautionary.  
Note: If migrating to firmware version 2.4.x, printers that had been added to earlier firmware versions (2.3.x or  
before) need to be associated with their driver again. To do this easily, go to the Print Shares page and click  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Drivers for that print share. In the drop-down list, select any other driver and click  
original driver and click again.  
. Then, select the  
Use the following procedure to install an upgrade:  
1. Download the firmware image (*.hp) from the HP support website and save it on a local hard drive or CD  
(http://www.hp.com/cposupport). The exact file location will be needed for step 3.  
2. Access the PSA's web interface and click Upgrade (on the menu under Maintenance).  
3. On the Upgrade page, type the complete path to the firmware image on the local hard drive (for example,  
"C:\TEMP\UPGRADE.HP") or click Browse to find the firmware image downloaded in step 2.  
4. Click  
to upload the upgrade file to the PSA.  
5. After the upgrade has completed, the Overview page is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Summary  
Links to related pages:  
Viewing and Printing the System Summary Page From the Web Interface  
This page explains how to view and print the PSA System Summary from the web interface. PSA settings are shown on the  
System Summary page. To access this page, select System Summary (in the web interface under Diagnostics). This page  
can be printed using the print function of the browser.  
The System Summary page has the following sections:  
To refresh this page, click  
.
General Information on the System Summary Page  
Parameter  
Description  
Model Name  
HP Print Server PSA 4250.  
Model number of the PSA.  
Ethernet address of the PSA.  
Model Number  
Ethernet Address  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Current Firmware Revision  
Current version of firmware running on this PSA.  
Base (Factory) Firmware Revision  
Version of firmware that the PSA would be rolled back to if it was reset to  
Patches Applied  
Lists any patches that have been applied to the PSA.  
Version of the BIOS on the device.  
BIOS Version  
Manufacturing Date Code  
Serial Number  
Manufacturing information for use by the factory.  
Serial number of this unit.  
Hard Drive Information  
Operating System Restored  
Data Area Restored  
Spool Area Restored  
Hard drive's identifier code.  
Date and time of last restore of the operating system.  
Date and time of last restore of the data area.  
Date and time of last restore of the spool area.  
TCP/IP Network Configuration Information  
Parameter  
Description  
IP Configuration Mode  
Current IP Address  
Current Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
How this unit was configured (manual or DHCP).  
IP address of this PSA.  
IP subnet mask of this PSA.  
Default gateway of this PSA.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Primary Domain Name Server (DNS)  
Address  
IP address of the primary DNS server.  
Secondary Domain Name Server (DNS)  
Address  
IP address of the secondary DNS server.  
Name of the IP domain to which this PSA belongs.  
DNS Domain Name  
Auto-negotiate  
Network link mode (enabled or disabled), speed (10T or 100T), and duplex  
(full or half).  
Microsoft Network Configuration Information  
Parameter  
Description  
Print Server Appliance Name  
Windows Domain or Workgroup  
Primary WINS Server Address  
Secondary WINS Server Address  
Domain Authentication  
Name of the PSA.  
Microsoft (R) domain or workgroup to which this PSA belongs.  
IP address of the primary WINS server.  
IP address of the secondary WINS server.  
Status of domain authentication (checked is enabled or "on").  
Status of auto discovery (checked is enabled or "on").  
List of domain controllers.  
Domain Controller Auto Discovery  
Specified Domain Controllers  
SNMP Configuration Information  
Parameter  
Description  
SNMPv1/v2  
Enables and disables SNMPv1/v2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMPv1/v2 Read and Write access  
SNMPv1/v2 Read-only access  
SNMPv3  
Allows SNMPv1/v2 read and write access.  
Allows SNMPv1/v2 read-only access.  
Enables and disables SNMPv3 access.  
SNMPv3 account name.  
SNMPv3 User Name  
SNMPv3 Authentication Key  
SNMPv3 Privacy Key  
Authentication Key for SNMPv3 account.  
Privacy Key for SNMPv3 account.  
SNMP Traps Information  
Parameter  
Description  
IP Address  
IP address of the trap recipient.  
Community Name  
Community Name that will be used in the traps packet (not the PSA's  
SNMP community name).  
Port  
Number of the port where the trap will be sent (typically 162).  
Administrators  
Parameter  
Description  
Local Administrators  
DomainAdministrators  
Names of the local administrators.  
Names of the domain administrators.  
SSL Configuration Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Parameter  
Description  
Installed Certificate  
New Certificate Status  
Common Name  
Type of certificate installed (Self-Signed or CA signed).  
Status of certificate (Installed or Pending).  
Fully qualified domain name or IP Address of the PSA. Used to identify  
the device HPX595.rose.hp.com.  
Organization  
Organizational Unit  
Validity Period  
Cipher Value  
Locality (City)  
State/Province  
Country  
Full legal name of your company.  
Specific department or division within your organization.  
Length of time (in days) for validity of the certificate.  
Cipher value of the certificate (Low, Medium, or High).  
City in which your organization is physically located.  
State or province (up to 68 characters).  
Two-character ISO country code.  
LPD Configuration Information  
Parameter  
Description  
LPD Printing Mode  
Specified LPD Hosts  
Status of LPD printing (checked is enabled or "on").  
List of host names permitted to print and manage print jobs using LPD.  
Print Shares Information  
This section consists of two lines:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The first line lists the printer name, the IP address or hostname, the remote queue name, drivers the share will point  
and print, any printer properties (for example: Paused, Print Banner, or Hide), and any share description text.  
Note: The suffix "CSR" means that driver is capable of client side rendering. When the driver was added and initialized,  
CSR capability was requested to resolve issues with W2K drivers. Problems resolved with a CSR driver include:  
N-up (printing multiple pages in a reduced format on one page)  
booklet style (format the print job into a printed booklet)  
watermark (print a watermark on each page of the document)  
ZoomSmart (scales a letter-sized/A4 document or poster to tabloid/A3, or vice versa)  
back-to-front (prints the document in reverse order)  
rotate 180 degrees (rotates the document layout but not the paper)  
The second line lists the security rights for the printer (who can print and at what level of access).  
Note: For Jetdirect internal cards or single-port external print servers, the Remote Queue Name will be raw. For Jetdirect 3-  
port external print servers, the Remote Queue Name will be raw1, raw2, or raw3.  
Installed Printer Drivers Information  
This section lists the printer drivers installed on this PSA.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostic Report  
Links to related pages:  
Viewing and Printing the Diagnostic Report from the Web Interface  
This page explains how to view and print the Diagnostic Report for the PSA from the web interface. To access this report, select  
Diagnostic Report (in the web interface under Diagnostics). This report can be printed using the print function of the browser.  
The Diagnostic Report has the following sections:  
The Diagnostic Report is a background process that is automatically run every ten minutes, querying resources across the  
network (for example, DNS, WINS, domain controllers, and printers).  
To refresh this page, click  
. This will initiate the process of querying the network, which can take a few minutes  
depending on the number of nodes contacted and their responsiveness. Each section of the Diagnostic Report has a different  
"freshness" attribute. See the section below for its attribute.  
Diagnostic  
Parameter  
Description  
Status last gathered  
Date and time that the diagnostic tests were last run. These tests are run  
every ten minutes and also when the administrator clicks the refresh button  
on the Diagnostic Report page.  
Report displayed  
Date and time that the Diagnostic Report was last displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System  
The values in the section are updated every minute.  
Parameter  
Description  
System Load (past 15 minutes):  
This metric ranges from 0% to 100% and shows how heavily the PSA has been  
used in the past 15 minutes. If the System Load often displays over 80%, the  
PSA is overloaded and some of the printers should be migrated to another PSA.  
Disk Usage  
This metric ranges from 0% to 100% and shows the amount of spool disk in  
use. If the Disk Usage value is  
above 80%: an error log is generated.  
above 90%: a critical log is generated  
100%: the PSA will not be able to print. The most common reason for  
high disk utilization is that one or more printers is not printing and  
print jobs are accumulating on the PSA for that printer or printers.  
Check the Printer Status on the Diagnostic Report page to see if this is  
true.  
High spool utilization can also indicate that the PSA is overloaded. If the PSA is  
frequently overloaded, some of the printers should be migrated to another PSA.  
DNS/WINS Servers  
The values in this section are updated each time status is gathered.  
Parameter  
Description  
DNS IP Address  
Connection Status  
IP address of the DNS server  
Valid statuses are  
Connected  
Cannot be contacted: The DNS server cannot be found. It does not  
respond to a network query or ping.  
No entry: The forward entry, the reverse entry, or both forward and  
reverse entries for the PSA are missing from the DNS server. These  
entries should be added to the DNS server.  
WINS IP Address  
IP address of the WINS server  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connection Status  
Valid statuses are  
Connected  
Cannot be contacted: The WINS server cannot be found. It does not  
respond to a network query or ping.  
No entry: The WINS server automatically adds an entry for the PSA  
onto the WINS server. If there is no entry for the PSA on the WINS  
server, the WINS server is not functioning properly.  
Domain Controllers  
This section is displayed if Domain Authentication is enabled on the PSA. The values in this section are updated each time  
status is gathered.  
Parameter  
Description  
Hostname  
Host name of the Domain Controller. This field is blank if there is no  
DNS entry for a domain controller, or if the PSA cannot access any DNS  
servers.  
IP Address  
Role  
IP Address of the Domain Controller  
Determined by the NetBIOS name from the WINS server. Valid statuses  
are  
Primary: Primary Domain Controller.  
Backup: Backup Domain Controller.  
Unknown: Either the Domain Controller cannot be contacted,  
or it is an Active Directory Domain Controller which means it is  
a peer (and there are no primary or backup domain controllers)..  
Connection Status  
Valid statuses are  
Connected  
Not configured: The PSA is in workgroup mode.  
Cannot be contacted: The domain controller cannot be found.  
It does not respond to a network query or ping.  
No DNS entry for the Domain Controller: The IP address for  
the domain controller on the DNS server is either not valid or  
not for the domain controller.  
No WINS entry for the domain: The WINS server  
automatically adds an entry for the PSA onto the domain  
controller. If there is no entry for the PSA on the domain  
controller, the WINS server is not functioning properly.  
Domain Controller not in the current domain: The domain  
controller is a valid domain controller. However, it is not  
associated with the same domain to which the PSA is currently  
joined.  
There is no machine account for this PSA on the Domain  
Controller: The machine account is not joined to the domain.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer Status  
The values in this section are updated each time status is gathered.  
Parameter  
Description  
Share Name  
Printer Address  
Share name for the printer.  
The printer address will be in the format <address>:<queuename>,  
where address is either the hostname or IP address, depending on what  
form the administrator entered when creating the share.  
Printer Connection Status*  
Valid statuses are  
Connected  
Printer cannot be contacted: The printer cannot be found. It  
does not respond to a network query or ping.  
LPD not supported: The printer does not support LPD.  
Printer SNMP Status*  
Valid statuses are  
Door open  
Low paper  
Low toner  
No paper  
No toner  
Offline  
Online  
Printer jammed  
Service required  
Unknown state: The printer might not support SNMP, or the  
network is busy and a response to the SNMP query was not  
received in the time-out period.  
Note: Printer information is only returned from printers that support the standard printer MIB (RFC1759). Printers that do not  
support the standard printer MIB or who have a real community name other than "Public" will display "Status unknown".  
Network Statistics  
The values in this section are updated every time the Diagnostic Report is displayed. To refresh only this section, select  
Diagnostic Report (on the menu under Maintenance) rather than pressing the Refresh button. New network statistics will  
be displayed without waiting for the network requests to all of the DNS servers, WINS servers, domain controllers, and printers.  
Parameter  
Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Total Packets Received  
Total Packets Transmitted  
Bad Packets Received  
Total number of network packets this unit has received since the last reboot.  
Total number of network packets this unit has transmitted since the last reboot.  
Total number of improperly formatted network packets received since the last  
reboot. A large number of bad packets may indicate network problems.  
Received Packets Dropped  
Number of packets dropped since the last reboot because the receive buffer is  
full.  
Framing Errors Received  
Transmit Packet Errors  
Number of improperly formatted frames received since the last reboot.  
Total number of errors that occurred since the last reboot while attempting to  
transmit.  
Transmit Packets Dropped  
Transmit Packet Overruns  
Transmit Collisions  
Number of attempted transmit packets dropped since the last reboot because  
of excessive collisions.  
Number of packets dropped since the last reboot while attempting to transmit  
because the receive buffer is full.  
Number of collisions encountered since the last reboot while attempting to  
transmit packets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Log  
Links within this document:  
Links to related documents:  
The Event Log is accessible through the web interface under General. It contains information about the appliance to  
facilitate troubleshooting and maintenance at your site. In addition, this log helps HP customer support in resolving  
problems. Events are listed on the log. Event log filters are used to sort the events displayed.  
Event Log Page  
To access the Event Log, click Event Log on the Main Menu (under General) in the web interface on the appliance.  
The Event Log page is displayed:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Buttons on the Event Log Page  
Button  
Name  
Description  
Displays the Event Log Filters page where filters can be selected, based on the message level  
and type. Only those events with the Level(s) and/or Type(s) selected will be included on the  
Event Log page.  
Displays any new events that have occurred. Use this button instead of the browser's Refresh  
button to ensure consistent behavior.  
Saves the event log, which is a tab-delimited file (psalog.tab), to the directory specified. Once  
saved, the file can be dragged and dropped onto a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, placing each  
event into its own row. The events can then be sorted. (The file can also be opened in a text  
editor but the results are not as clean.)  
Note: If "Filters are ON" is displayed at the top of the log, there might be events that are not  
displayed. Before the event log is saved, it is recommended to click  
the filters. Then review the log prior to saving it.  
and check all of  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Deletes all entries from the Event Log. A confirmation message is displayed. After the log is  
cleared, a new entry is displayed in the log with the date and time the log was cleared and the  
name of the administrator who cleared it.  
Note: If "Filters are ON" is displayed at the top of the log, there might be logged events that are  
not displayed. Before the event log is cleared, it is recommended to click  
all of the filters. Then review the log prior to clearing it.  
and check  
Displays online help for the Event Log.  
Fields on the Event Log Page  
Field Name  
Description  
Event Log  
(filtered log)  
or  
Event Log (full  
unfiltered log)  
filtered log - On the Event Log Filters page, filters (Types and Levels) have been selected  
that have screened out messages that are currently in the Event Log.  
full unfiltered log - All of the messages in the Event Log are displayed; none have been  
filtered out.  
Timestamps  
Level  
The date and time of the event.  
Indicates the urgency of the message. One or more of the following levels of messages  
(determnined by the filter(s) selected on the Event Log Filters page) can be displayed:  
CRIT (Critical error) - an error that affects the basic funtions of multiple users and/  
or administrators. For example, users cannot print or administrators cannot  
perform administrative functions. Typically caused by a complete failure of a  
network component.  
ERR (Error) - an error that affects the functions of only one or more users or  
administrators, but not all. The majority of users or administrators can still perform  
their functions.  
INFO (Informational) - an important system event. For example, a new driver has  
been added. (Events that occur more often, such as completing a print job, are not  
included.)  
Type  
Groupings of Event Log messages. One or more of the following types of messages  
(determnined by the filter(s) selected on the Event Log Filters page) can be displayed:  
SEC (Security) - displays all Security-related messages  
NET (Networking) - displays all Networking-related messages  
ADM (Administrative) - displays all Administrative-related messages  
ID  
Log number for the event. Click on the message ID number to get more information about  
that message.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Message  
Text message that describes the event.  
Event Log Filters  
Event Log filters are used to sort messages automatically so that only those messages of a certain type and/or level  
are displayed. Click  
to display the Event Log Filters page:  
The following filters can be selected for events. One or more Type filters and one or more Level filters must be  
selected:  
Levels (at least one must be selected):  
CRIT (Critical error) - an error that affects the basic funtions of multiple users and/or  
administrators. For example, users cannot print or administrators cannot perform  
administrative functions. Typically caused by a complete failure of a network component.  
ERR (Error) - an error that affects the functions of only one or more users or administrators,  
but not all. The majority of users or administrators can still perform their functions.  
INFO (Informational) - an important system event. For example, a new driver has been  
added. (Events that occur more often, such as completing a print job, are not included.)  
Types (at least one must be selected):  
SEC (Security) - displays all Security-related messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NET (Networking) - displays all Networking-related messages  
ADM (Administrative) - displays all Administrative-related messages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initiated standard shutdown (102)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The PSA was shut down safely. This is generally done by using the power  
button on the front panel or through Restart (in the web interface under Maintenance).  
Completed standard startup (103)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The PSA completed startup. The preceding shutdown was a safe shutdown  
(typically through the power button on the front panel or through the web interface using  
Restart (in the web interface under Maintenance).  
Note: If the administrator's name cannot be determined and is displayed as "None", then it  
must have been changed using the front panel.  
Completed non-standard startup -- followed abrupt shutdown (104)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The PSA completed startup after an abrupt shutdown, perhaps from a power  
disruption.  
Action: Non-standard startups may require the PSA to restore the operating system from a  
safe copy. If configuration data (for example, networking, printer, and driver settings) is  
no longer resident on the PSA, use a backup to restore the settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Running on UPS battery due to power failure (105)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description:A power failure occurred and the PSA began relying on the Uninterruptable  
Power Supply (UPS) battery for its power.  
Shutdown initiated due to low UPS battery (106)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: After a power disruption, the PSA is schedule to run for one minute on the  
Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) battery. This permits a safe shutdown of the PSA.  
However, during this period, the UPS reached a power level that was too low and, in  
response to this, the PSA shut itself down. The battery might be weak or old. Or the power  
might have cycled multiple times but the battery did not have a chance to recharge.  
Action: Try recharging the UPS battery or replacing the battery with a new one.  
Shutdown initiated. UPS battery run time expired (107)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: After a power disruption, the PSA is scheduled to run for one minute on the  
UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply) battery. This permits a safe shutdown of the PSA.  
That one minute period has expired, so the PSA shut itself down.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shutdown cancelled. Normal power restored (108)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: Normal power has been restored to the PSA, so the PSA is no longer reliant  
on the UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply) battery backup. Additionally, the shutdown  
that was planned for the PSA due to the power disruption has been cancelled.  
High disk utilization-disk utilization is at 80-90% of capacity (109)  
Level: Error  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The spool partition on the PSA is at 80-90% of capacity. This may be due to  
one of the following conditions:  
one or more printers are not online  
connectivity to one or more printers has been disrupted  
unusually high printing volume by users  
Action: It is necessary for the administrator to take one or more of the following actions:  
check online status of printers  
check the connectivity of printers  
evaluate print network configuration (improved throughput can occur with the  
addition of more printers per PSA or with the reduction of the number of users per  
PSA)  
Critically high disk utilization-disk utilization is at 90-100% of capacity (110)  
Level: Critical Error  
Category: Administrative  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description: The spool partition on the PSA is at 90-100% of capacity. This may be due  
to one of the following conditions:  
one or more printers are not online  
connectivity to one or more printers has been disrupted  
unusually high printing volume by users  
Action: It is necessary for the administrator to take one or more of the following actions:  
check online status of printers  
check the connectivity of printers  
evaluate print network configuration (improved throughput can occur with the  
addition of more printers per PSA or with the reduction of the number of users per  
PSA)  
DHCP provided hostname discarded-value is too long or invalid. Using manually provided value  
(111)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Networking  
Description: The hostname provided by DHCP was longer than the maximum number of  
characters allowed or it included invalid characters. (This does not include the domain  
portion of the hostname.) As a result, the hostname provided on the TCP/IP and DNS  
Settings is being used. If no hostname has been provided, the default value is used.  
Action: The administrator should ensure that they have provided a valid and appropriate  
hostname on the TCP/IP and DNS Settings page.  
DHCP provided domain name discarded- value is too long or invalid. Using manually provided  
value (112)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description: The DNS domain name provided by DHCP was longer than the maximum  
number of characters allowed or it included invalid characters. As a result, the DNS  
domain name provided on the TCP/IP and DNS Settings page is being used. If no DNS  
domain name has been provided, the default value is used.  
Action: The administrator should ensure that they have provided a valid and appropriate  
DNS domain name on the TCP/IP and DNS Settings page.  
Cannot communicate with domain controller (200)  
Level: Error  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The domain controller experienced one of the following conditions:  
network problems (cable malfunction, hub, or router problems)  
not on the network  
the IP address or host name specified is not a domain controller  
power is disconnected or interrupted  
Action: Check the Domain Membership Status field on the Microsoft Network Settings  
page (in the web interface under Networking) to verify that the PSA can communicate  
with the domain controller. If the domain controller the PSA was communicating with is  
no longer available, the PSA will attempt to find another domain controller from the  
following:  
the WINS server  
broadcasting on the local subnet  
the DNS server  
If the DNS server, WINS server, or Domain Controller is not on the same subnet as the  
PSA, ensure that the TCP/IP configurations, as entered on the TCP/IP and DNS page (in  
the web interface under Networking), are configured correctly and that the network  
infrastructure, such as the default gateway, is configured and is operational.  
Cannot communicate with any domain controllers (201)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Level: Critical Error  
Category: Security  
Description: The PSA was unable to communicate with a Primary Domain Controller  
(PDC) or a Backup Domain Controller (BDC) (if one is set up) to verify the user's name  
and password. This means that clients will not be allowed to print because a Domain  
Controller was not available to verify the user's name and password.  
Action:  
Check your WINS server, domain controllers, routers, and other network  
infrastructure to verify proper set up and operation. Are they plugged in and turned  
on?  
If you specified automatic discovery of the domain controllers on the Microsoft  
Network Settings page (in the web interface under Networking), try changing to a  
list of specific domain controllers on that same page.  
If the DNS server, WINS server, or Domain Controller is not on the same subnet as  
the PSA, ensure that the TCP/IP configurations, as entered on the TCP/IP and  
DNS page (in the web interface under Networking), are configured correctly and  
that the network infrastructure, such as the default gateway, is configured and is  
operational.  
If the problem persists, try specifying the list of Domain Controllers using IP  
addresses instead of NetBIOS or DNS names.  
Authentication failed -- user authentication via Microsoft networking was unsuccessful (203)  
Level: Error  
Category: Security  
Description:The user attempted to access the PSA using NT native tools, but the request  
was denied because either the user identity was not confirmed or the user was not  
authorized to use the PSA. One or more of the following errors may have occurred:  
The user name and password combination was not valid.  
The user logged into a machine that was not joined to the NT domain.  
Action:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Retype the user name and password combination.  
If the user machine was not in the same domain as the PSA or was not in a trusted  
domain, the user should type domain\user name and password for correct  
authentication.  
Verify that the user account exists.  
Monitor the log file for additional unauthorized access attempts.  
Permission denied - user not allowed to connect to printer (205)  
Level: Error  
Category: Security  
Description: The user tried to perform an action without the proper access level.  
Action:  
If NT Domain authentication has been enabled on the Microsoft Network  
Settings page (in the web interface under Networking), the security settings may  
have changed. Verify that the user has authority to print. This can be done from the  
web interface by selecting Print Shares -->Security.  
By default, the group "Everyone" has permission to print. If "Everyone" does not  
have permission to print, add either the specific user, or a group to which the user  
belongs. The group "Everyone" normally contains all the users.  
Monitor the log file for additional unauthorized access attempts.  
Cannot communicate with WINS server (209)  
Level: Error  
Category: Networking  
Description: The WINS server specified on the Microsoft Network Settings page (in the  
web interface under Networking) experienced one of the following conditions:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
network problems (cable malfunction, hub, or router problems)  
not on the network  
the IP address or host name specified is not a domain controller  
power is disconnected or interrupted  
Action:  
Retype the WINS server address in the xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format on Microsoft  
Network Settings page and try again.  
A properly configured WINS server is essential for the proper operation of the  
PSA. If the PSA cannot reach the WINS server, users on other subnets (on the  
other side of a router) will not be able to see the PSA in Network Neighborhood.  
If the DNS server, WINS server, or Domain Controller is not on the same subnet as  
the PSA, ensure that the TCP/IP configurations, as entered on the TCP/IP and  
DNS page (in the web interface under Networking), are configured correctly and  
that the network infrastructure, such as the default gateway, is configured and is  
operational.  
Failed WINS name resolution (210)  
Level: Error  
Category: Networking  
Description: The PSA could communicate with the WINS server but could not resolve  
the name. A properly configured WINS server is essential for the proper operation of the  
PSA. If the PSA cannot use the WINS server to resolve IP addresses, it will not be able to  
communicate with the device.  
Action: The NT Domain Name might have been misspelled on the Microsoft Network  
Settings page (in the web interface under Networking).  
Make sure the network has a WINS server configured and the WINS server address on the  
Microsoft Network Settings page is correct. Make sure the WINS server has an entry for  
the device being looked up.  
For example, if the WINS server does not reply with the IP address of a Domain  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controller, the PSA will not be able to authenticate users.  
Permission denied- user not allowed to delete, pause, or resume print job (213)  
Level: Error  
Category: Security  
Description: The user did not have proper access rights to delete, pause, or resume print  
jobs.  
Access rights include:  
Print (print, pause, and delete your own print jobs)  
Manage Documents (pause and delete other user's print jobs)  
Full Control (print, pause, and delete other user's print jobs, delete printers, and  
change security settings)  
No Access  
Special Access (for some Windows 2000 permissions that do not map directly to  
the above four permission levels)  
Action: One or more of the following actions may apply.  
Grant the user "Manage Documents" or "Full control" through the Print Shares  
page (in the web interface under Print Services).  
Monitor the log file for additional unauthorized access attempts.  
For more information, see NT Domain Security.  
Cannot communicate with DNS server (214)  
Level: Error  
Category: Networking  
Description: The DNS server specified on the Microsoft Network Settings page (in the  
web interface under Networking) experienced one of the following conditions:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
network problems (cable malfunction, hub, or router problems)  
not on the network  
the IP address or host name specified is not a domain controller  
power is disconnected or interrupted  
Action:  
Retype the DNS server address in the xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format on Microsoft  
Network Settings page and try again.  
A properly configured DNS server is essential for the proper operation of the PSA.  
If the PSA cannot reach the DNS server, users on other subnets (on the other side  
of a router) will not be able to see the PSA in Network Neighborhood.  
If the DNS servers, WINS servers, or Domain Controller are not on the same  
subnet as the PSA, ensure that the TCP/IP configurations, as entered on the TCP/  
IP and DNS page (in the web interface under Networking), are configured  
correctly and that the network infrastructure, such as the default gateway, is  
configured and is operational.  
Cannot communicate with any WINS servers (215)  
Level: Critical Error  
Category: Networking  
Description: The WINS servers specified on the Microsoft Network  
Settings page (in the web interface under Networking) experienced one of  
the following conditions:  
network problems (cable malfunction, hub, or router problems)  
not on the network  
the IP address or host name specified is not a domain controller  
power is disconnected or interrupted  
Action:  
Retype the WINS servers' addresses in the xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format  
on Microsoft Network Settings page and try again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Properly configured WINS servers are essential for the proper  
operation of the PSA. If the PSA cannot reach the WINS servers,  
users on other subnets (on the other side of a router) will not be able  
to see the PSA in Network Neighborhood.  
If the DNS servers, WINS servers, or Domain Controller are not on  
the same subnet as the PSA, ensure that the TCP/IP configurations,  
as entered on the TCP/IP and DNS page (in the web interface under  
Networking), are configured correctly and that the network  
infrastructure, such as the default gateway, is configured and is  
operational.  
Cannot communicate with any DNS servers (216)  
Level: Critical Error  
Category: Networking  
Description: The DNS servers specified on the Microsoft Network Settings page (in the  
web interface under Networking) experienced one of the following conditions:  
network problems (cable malfunction, hub, or router problems)  
not on the network  
the IP address or host name specified is not a domain controller  
power is disconnected or interrupted  
Action:  
Retype the DNS servers' address in the xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format on Microsoft  
Network Settings page and try again.  
Properly configured DNS servers are essential for the proper operation of the PSA.  
If the PSA cannot reach the DNS servers, users on other subnets (on the other side  
of a router) will not be able to see the PSA in Network Neighborhood.  
If the DNS servers, WINS server, or Domain Controller is not on the same subnet  
as the PSA, ensure that the TCP/IP configurations, as entered on the TCP/IP and  
DNS page (in the web interface under Networking), are configured correctly and  
that the network infrastructure, such as the default gateway, is configured and is  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
operational.  
Authentication failed (217)  
Level: Error  
Category: Security  
Description: The user attempted to access the PSA, but the request was denied because  
the user identity was not confirmed or user was not authorized to use the PSA.  
Action: It is necessary for the administrator to take one or more of the following actions:  
retype the name and password combination  
verify that the user account exists  
monitor the log file for additional unauthorized access attempts  
Authorization failed - local account (218)  
Level: Error  
Category: Security  
Description: The user attempted to access PSA, but the request was but the request was  
denied because the user identity was not confirmed or user was not authorized to use the  
PSA. Local account access to the PSA is supported when NT Domain authentication is  
disabled on the Microsoft Network Settings page (in the web interface under  
Networking).  
Action: It is necessary for the administrator to take one or more of the following actions:  
retype the name and password combination  
verify that the user account exists  
monitor the log file for additional unauthorized access attempts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Authorization failed - domain account (219)  
Level: Error  
Category: Security  
Description: The user attempted to access the PSA, but the request was denied because  
the user identity was not confirmed or the user was not authorized to use the PSA. Domain  
account access to the PSA is supported when NT Domain authentication is enabled on the  
Microsoft Network Settings page (in the web interface under Networking).  
Action: It is necessary for the administrator to take one or more of the following actions:  
retype the name and password combination  
verify that the user account exists  
monitor the log file for additional unauthorized access attempts  
Rejected client connection due to resource limits (221)  
Level: Error  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The PSA limits the number of simultaneous client printer connections.  
For printing, this limit is rarely an issue; clients usually connect, then send their print job  
(s), and then disconnect. Across a large population it is possible, although unlikely, that a  
sufficiently large number of clients might choose to print at the same time.  
Another situation that can use up available connections occurs when clients open the  
printer window in order to view their print jobs. Leaving the printer window open will  
hold the connection open even after the jobs have been printed.  
Action:  
If a large number of clients frequently print at the same time, it might be necessary  
to redistribute some clients onto another PSA.  
Clients should be encouraged to close the printer window when it is no longer  
showing their jobs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cannot communicate with the printer (300)  
Level: Error  
Category: Networking  
Description: Communications between the PSA and the printer were interrupted while  
the PSA was sending a print job to the printer. This could be due to a potential printer  
problem.  
Action:  
Make sure the printer is plugged in and turned on.  
Make sure the IP address entered is the correct IP address for the printer.  
Check the cables for the PSA and the printer to make sure they are connected and  
secure.  
Failed DNS name resolution (301)  
Level: Error  
Category: Networking  
Description:  
The IP address and host name of the printer were incorrect (see the TCP/IP and  
DNS page (in the web interface under Networking).  
The DNS server configuration was incorrect.  
Action: One or more of the following may apply:  
Use the IP address rather than the host name.  
Check the IP address and host name of the printer on the printer's Properties page  
(in the web interface under Print Services-->Print Shares).  
Check the DNS Address and DNS Domain Name on the TCP/IP and DNS page  
(in the web interface under Networking). Note that only alphanumeric characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
with no spaces are allowed. Dashes ( - ) and periods ( . ) are also accepted.  
Verify that the domain controllers, WINS servers, and printers have valid DNS  
entries.  
Failure to resolve DNS names can cause the PSA to not function properly. For  
example, if the PSA cannot resolve the Domain Controller's name to an IP address,  
it cannot authenticate users.  
You should verify that the domain controllers, WINS servers, and printers all have  
valid DNS entries. A valid DNS entry requires an entry in both the forward and  
reverse lookup tables on the DNS server to enable the resolution from the DNS  
Domain Name (printers.my.com) or from the IP address.  
Permission denied- host not allowed print access to printer (302)  
Level: Error  
Category: Security  
Description: The client computer sending the print job was not allowed to make LPD  
connections to the printer.  
Action: One or more of the following actions may apply:  
On the LPD Printing page (in the web interface under Networking), add that  
host's IP address or DNS Domain Name to the list of allowed hosts.  
Monitor the log file for additional unauthorized access attempts.  
Cannot route print job to printer- network path not found (303)  
Level: Error  
Category: Networking  
Description: There is a problem with the network between the PSA and the printer.  
Action: One or more of the following actions may apply:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check to make sure the printer is plugged in, is turned on, and is online.  
Check the status of network components in the print path. This includes whether  
components are in-service and powered up.  
Check the configuration of network components in the print path. This includes IP  
addresses and other settings. components include the PSA, the default gateway of  
the PSA, the printer, and network infrastructure (routers, switches, cables, and so  
forth.).  
Cannot connect to printer-- connection refused by the printer (304)  
Level: Critical Error  
Category: Networking  
Description: The printer was able to communicate with the PSA, but the printer refused  
to allow the PSA to connect to the LPD port (port 515). HP networked printers only allow  
8 simultaneous LPD connections and refuse connection number 9. HP printers with many  
separate sources for LPD print jobs may generate this error.  
Action: Verify that the IP address for the printer is for a printer (not some other device)  
(in the web interface under Print Services-->Print Shares-->Properties). Some older HP  
Jetdirect print server firmware (the network interface card for HP Printers) only allows  
one connection; you should upgrade the Jetdirect firmware card to the latest available  
version of firmware for the card. (Access the latest firmware at http://www.hp.com.)  
Detected printer problem (305)  
Level: Critical Error  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The PSA was able to communicate with the printer, but the print job was not  
printed due to one of the following reasons:  
no paper  
no toner  
printer door open  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
paper jam  
printer is off-line  
service required for the printer  
Action: Fix the identified problem at the printer.  
Changed IP address (400)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The IP address of the PSA has been changed successfully on the TCP/IP  
and DNS page of the web interface or through the front panel of the PSA.  
Note: If the administrator's name cannot be determined and is displayed as "None", then it  
must have been changed using the front panel.  
Added printer (401)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The printer has been added to the PSA successfully using the Add Printer  
feature either in Web Jetadmin (on the PSA Print Share Management page) or in the  
web interface (Print Services-->Print Share List).  
Deleted printer (402)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The printer was deleted successfully on the Printer Share List page (in the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
web interface under Print Services).  
Changed printer IP address (403)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The IP address for the printer has been changed successfully on the printer's  
Properties page (in the web interface under Print Services-->Print Shares--  
Upgraded firmware (404)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The firmware for the PSA has been upgraded successfully using the  
Upgrade feature (in the web interface under Maintenance).  
Deleted printer driver (405)  
Level: Informational  
Category:Administrative  
Description: The printer driver was deleted successfully on the Driver Management  
page (in the web interface under Print Services-->Driver Management).  
Cleared log file (406)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The event log file has been cleared successfully on the Event Log page (in  
the web interface under Maintenance).  
Backed up settings (407)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The configuration settings for the PSA have been backed up successfully  
using the Backup feature (in the web interface under Maintenance).  
Failed to restore settings from backup file (408)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The configuration settings for the PSA could not be restored from the  
specified backup file using the Restore feature (in the web interface under Maintenance).  
Added administrator account (409)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The administrator account has been added to the PSA successfully using the  
Administrators feature (in the web interface under Security).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleted administrator account (410)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The administrator account was removed from the PSA successfully using  
the remove feature in Administrators (in the web interface under Security).  
Changed WINS server address (411)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The WINS server address has been successfully changed on the Microsoft  
Network Settings page (in the web interface under Networking).  
Changed Windows domain or workgroup name (412)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The Windows NT domain or workgroup name has been changed  
successfully on the Microsoft Network Settings page (in the web interface under  
Networking).  
Enabled NT domain authentication (413)  
Level: Informational  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Category: Administrative  
Description: NT domain authentication has been enabled on the Microsoft Network  
Settings page (in the web interface under Networking).  
Disabled NT domain authentication (414)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: NT domain authentication has been disabled on the Microsoft Network  
Settings page (in the web interface under Networking)..  
Added account in NT domain (415)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: A new computer account for the PSA was created on the NT domain using  
the Microsoft Network Settings page (in the web interface under Networking).  
Enabled LPD printing for all hosts (416)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: LPD printing has been enabled for all hosts on the LPD Settings page (in  
the web interface under Networking).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enabled LPD printing for specified hosts (417)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: LPD printing has been enabled for selected hosts on the LPD Settings page  
(in the web interface under Networking).  
Disabled LPD printing for all hosts (418)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: LPD printing has been disabled on the LPD Settings page (in the web  
interface under Networking).  
Set NT user capabilities (419)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: A user's access level for a particular printer has been changed through  
Administrators (in the web interface under Security).  
Failed to create NT domain machine account (420)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: Using the Microsoft Network Settings page (in the web interface under  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Networking), creation of a machine account failed. This means that Microsoft networking  
will not work until a machine account has been created. This could be due to any of the  
following reasons.  
The user name and password combination was not valid.  
The user specified does not have authority to create a machine account.  
The WINS server was not properly configured.  
Action: One or more of the following actions may apply:  
Re-type the user name and password and try again.  
Check the security levels for that user on the Primary Domain Controller (PDC).  
Verify that you have a WINS server configured and that the WINS server has an  
entry for the Primary Domain Controller.  
Use the MS Server Manager to create the account (and avoid using the Microsoft  
Network Settings page).  
Failed to join NT domain (421)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: NT Domain Authentication will not work.  
Action: Verify that the WINS server configuration on the PSA is correct (as entered on  
the Microsoft Network Settings page). Attempt to recreate the machine account on the  
NT Domain. Instead of specifying automatic discovery of the domain controller, enter the  
IP address of the domain controller.  
Changed PSA name (422)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The name of the print server PSA was changed successfully on the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Microsoft Network Settings page (in the web interface under Networking).  
Changed time (423)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The time was changed successfully on the Date and Time page (in the web  
interface under Networking).  
Removed administrator access from domain accounts (424)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: An administrator account was successfully deleted from the specified  
domain on the Admin Accounts - Domain Accounts page (in the web interface under  
Security-->Administrators).  
Changed DNS server address (425)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The DNS server address has been successfully changed on the TCP/IP and  
DNS page (in the web interface under Networking).  
Changed SSL encryption level (426)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The level of SSL encryption used for encrypting the http data has been  
changed successfully.  
Installed self-signed certificate (427)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: A new self-signed certificate (signed by the PSA) has been created and is  
now on the PSA.  
Note: If the administrator's name cannot be determined and is displayed as "None", then it  
must have been changed using the front panel.  
Generated a certificate request to send to a certificate signing authority (428)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: A certificate signing request has been generated; the user now needs to send  
this request to the Certification Authority to sign and install the certificate.  
Installed certificate from a certificate signing authority (429)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The new certificate that was requested from the Certification Authority has  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
been installed on the PSA. The new certificate will be used for future connections.  
Failed to install certificate from a certificate signing authority - the certificate credentials do not  
match the pending request (430)  
Level: Error  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The attempt to install or replace the existing certificate on the PSA has  
failed due to the certificate's public key.  
Action: Ensure that the signed certificate is being installed against the same certificate  
request. This means modifications cannot be made to the signed certificate after it has  
been received from the certificate authority. The signed certificate must also belong to the  
same PSA on which the certificate request was generated.  
Enabled SNMP v1/v2 (431)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: SNMP v1/v2 has been enabled. In "RO" mode the agent will only respond to  
snmp-get requests. In "RW" mode the agent will respond to both snmp-get and snmp-set  
requests.  
Disabled SNMP v1/v2 (432)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: SNMP v1/v2 has been turned off. The PSA will no longer respond to  
SNMPv1/v2 requests. However, registered hosts will still receive traps.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enabled SNMP v3 (433)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: An SNMPv3 account has been created and installed on the PSA.  
Disabled SNMP v3 (434)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: All SNMPv3 accounts have been removed from the PSA.  
Added destination to SNMP trap notification list (435)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: A host has been added to the list of recipients of SNMPv2 traps.  
Removed destination from SNMP trap notification list (436)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: A host has been deleted from the list of recipients of SNMPv2 traps.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enabled redirection to HTTPS (437)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: Redirecting the http request to the secure port has been enabled. Any http  
request for port 80 will be sent over the SSL (secure socket layer).  
Disabled redirection to HTTPS (438)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: Redirecting the http request to the secure port has been disabled. Any http  
request for port 80 will be processed by the web server as a non-secure request and any  
https request will get processed as a secure connection.  
Added WINS server (439)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The WINS server was added successfully on the Microsoft Network  
Settings page (in the web interface under Networking).  
Deleted WINS server (440)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description: The WINS server was deleted successfully on the Microsoft Network  
Settings page (in the web interface under Networking).  
Added DNS server (441)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The DNS server was added successfully on the TCP/IP and DNS page (in  
the web interface under Networking).  
Deleted DNS server (442)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The DNS server was deleted successfully on the TCP/IP and DNS page (in  
the web interface under Networking).  
Failed to upgrade firmware (443)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The firmware for the PSA has not been upgraded.  
Failed to backup settings (444)  
Level: Informational  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The configuration settings for the PSA have failed to back up. A backup file  
has not been generated.  
Failed to restore settings from backup file (445)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The configuration settings from the backup file have not been restored.  
Created NT domain account (446)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description:The NT domain account was successfully created.  
Joined NT domain (447)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description:The administrator account successfully joined the NT domain.  
Installed printer driver (500)  
Level: Informational  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The printer driver was successfully installed onto the PSA.  
Initialized printer driver (501)  
Level: Informational  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The printer driver was successfully initialized on the PSA and can now be  
used for point and print.  
Printer driver installation failed (502)  
Level: Error  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The printer driver was not installed onto the PSA. One of the following  
conditions exist:  
The user trying to install the printer driver has insufficient rights on the PSA or on  
the PC.  
In order to install drivers onto the PSA, a user must be logged onto the PC with a  
user account that has permission to install software on that PC, and have a  
corresponding administrator account on the PSA. If NT domain authentication is  
enabled (in the web interface under Networking-->Microsoft Network Settings  
page), administrator accounts on the PSA can be set up on the Domain Account  
page (in the web interface under Security-->Administrators). If NT domain  
authentication is not enabled, the user must set up a local administrator account on  
the PSA, with a user name and password that matches the NT user account.  
There is a communication error with the PSA.  
There is a problem with the printer driver. Reasons might be:  
the INF file is an inappropriate format.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the INF file cannot be found.  
the process was canceled by the user.  
insufficient memory on the PC.  
the driver failed to queue correctly.  
the path to the .inf file exceeds the 128 character maximum.  
the .inf file is for an operating system that is incompatible with the  
operating system that the user selected.  
there is another instance of the HP Add Driver Wizard running on this PC.  
Action:  
In the case of a communication error, try again when there is less traffic on the  
network.  
Check for an updated version of the driver. (Go to http:\\www.hp.com.)  
Select a different .inf file that matches the operating system selected.  
Select an .inf file with a path less than 128 characters in length.  
Configure the PSA and PC with appropriate access credentials as described in  
Description above.  
Printer driver initialization failed. Driver has been disabled for automatic driver download (point  
and print) (503)  
Level: Error  
Category: Administrative  
Description: The driver could not be initialized and has been disabled by the PSA.  
Disabled drivers are not suitable for point and print.  
Action:  
Add drivers from http:\\www.hp.com if you need HP drivers. You will be sure to get the  
latest version of the driver.  
Installed printer driver - installed driver was for a different OS version than specified (504)  
Level: Informational  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Category: Administrative  
Description: Drivers for older operating systems (for example, NT) can successfully  
work with newer operating systems (for example, XP). Consequently, new drivers are not  
always developed for newer operating systems if an older driver works with the operating  
system. This message indicates that a newer driver was actually installed, and not an older  
driver.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Messages  
Links within this page:  
Under Print Services:  
Under Networking:  
Under Security:  
Under Maintenance:  
Under Diagnostics:  
Links to related pages:  
Add Printer Wizard and Add Driver Wizard  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Message  
Explanation / Remedy  
driver failed to initialize  
In order for drivers to be deployed to client machines via point  
and print, the drivers must be properly initialized. If a driver has  
failed to initialize it will be disabled by the PSA and cannot be  
enabled (but it can be re-installed).  
A disabled driver may still be associated with a printer, but when  
a client tries to install that printer the driver files will not be  
provided by the PSA and the user will be prompted to provide  
the printer driver files.  
driver failed to install  
The driver was not installed successfully. Please try again.  
driver_name installed as a Windows NT 4.0  
driver  
The driver you specified for Windows 2000/XP is really a  
Windows NT 4.0 driver and has been installed as such. Although  
this driver will probably work, you may wish to determine if  
there is a "native" 2000/XP driver available for this printer. To  
do this, locate and install the native Windows 2000/XP driver in  
order to ensure this driver works properly with Windows 2000  
and Windows XP. If you choose not to find the native driver,  
make sure to test the driver thoroughly after it has been  
installed and initialized.  
driver - installing...  
Informational.  
driver_name driver - invalid .inf file.  
The .inf file specified might be corrupted or it might not be a  
driver setup information file. Verify that the specified .inf file is a  
printer setup information file and retry. If the problem persists,  
try a different copy of the desired driver or consider using a  
different driver.  
driver successfully initialized  
driver successfully installed  
driver - keeping existing driver  
Informational.  
Informational.  
User chose to not replace a driver that was already installed on  
the PSA.  
Adding drivers requires Java. Your browser  
doesn't have Java, or has disabled Java.  
Before drivers can be installed, Java must be installed and  
JavaScript enabled in your web browser. JavaScript can be  
enabled in Internet Explorer, under:  
To enable Java, change your browser's settings.  
Internet Options-->Security (tab)-->Custom Level (button)--  
>Scripting-->Scripting of Java Applets (subheading)  
If you're using Internet Explorer 6, you  
probably need to download Java. Search the  
Microsoft web site for Q299672 to learn how to  
install Microsoft's Java Component.  
If a Java virtual machine is not installed in the browser, refer to  
Sun Microsystem's web site or to Microsoft's web site for  
information about downloading one. Then make sure the virtual  
machine is turned on. In Internet Explorer, go to:  
Internet Options-->Security (tab)-->Custom Level (button)--  
>Microsoft VM  
Select any option other than "disable".  
Application Error  
Driver Management software not installed  
properly.  
Try emptying your browser's cache, then close down all  
instances of your browser. Then restart your browser. If the  
problem persists, please contact HP support.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application Error  
There may be another instance of the HP Add Driver Wizard  
running on this PC. Make sure there are no other instances of  
the Add Driver Wizard running, then try running the Add Driver  
Wizard again.  
There may be another instance of the HP Add  
Driver Wizard running on this PC. Close down  
all instances of the Add Driver Wizard, then try  
running the Add Driver Wizard again.  
Application error:  
The application performing the driver installation and  
initialization has experienced an error. This error may be  
generated by a variety of problems from network  
communication issues to .inf file corruption.  
This application experienced an error  
error_description. Try running it again. If the  
problem persists, consult the help file or the on-  
line documentation. (Possible errors are listed  
below.)  
Verify the following:  
that the PSA network configuration information are  
correct and running (for example, WINS server or  
manually specified domain controller addresses), and  
the provided .inf files are valid printer setup information  
files and that the correct operating system has been  
associated with each .inf file.  
Add printer driver failure  
Printer driver is not compatible with OS  
Insufficient memory  
Can't build driver info from *.inf file  
Initialization setup file queue failure  
Commit setup file queue failure  
Access denied  
Cannot find MFG  
File not found  
Server not found  
Driver not found  
Try using a different copy of the desired driver or a different  
driver. If the problem persists, please contact HP support.  
Canceling. Please wait...  
Informational.  
Download Error: Add Driver Software  
Self explanatory.  
There may be another instance of the HP Add  
Driver Wizard running on this PC or you may be  
logged to this PC with insufficient privileges.  
Make sure there are no other instances of the  
Add Driver Wizard running and verify that you  
are logged in to this PC with the appropriate  
access privileges, then try running the Add  
Driver Wizard again.  
Driver could not be initialized:  
In order for drivers to be deployed to client machines via point  
and print, the drivers must be properly initialized. If a driver has  
failed to initialize it will be disabled by the PSA and cannot be  
enabled (but it can be re-installed).  
This driver could not be initialized on the PSA,  
so it has been disabled for automatic driver  
download (for example, point and print).  
Clients will have to supply their own driver.  
A disabled driver may still be associated with a printer, but when  
a client tries to install that printer the driver files will not be  
provided by the PSA and the user will be prompted to provide  
the printer driver files.  
Try adding this driver again. Add the version of  
this driver that supports this PC's operating  
system first. Then add drivers for additional  
operating systems.  
Driver could not be initialized:  
In order for driver initialization to run, a FILE: port must be  
installed on your PC. Because the driver could not be initialized,  
it has been disabled. Please reinstall the FILE: port and then  
reinstall this driver.  
This PC has no FILE: port. A file port is required  
to perform the necessary driver initialization.  
Please re-install the file port on this PC before  
adding more drivers to the PSA.  
This driver could not be initialized on the PSA,  
so it has been disabled for automatic driver  
download (for example, point and print).  
Clients will have to supply their own driver.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver does not match OS:  
The driver specified for Windows 2000/XP is really a Windows NT  
4.0 driver and has been installed as such.  
The driver information file file_name that was  
specified for Windows 2000/XP is actually a  
driver information file for Windows NT 4.0. The  
specified driver has been installed, but it will  
appear in your driver list as a Windows NT 4.0  
driver. This driver may or may not be  
compatible with Windows 2000/XP. HP  
recommends that you test the driver  
thoroughly. For more information about drivers,  
consult the online manual.  
Although this driver will probably work, you may wish to  
determine if there is a "native" 2000/XP driver available for this  
printer. To do this, locate and install the native Windows 2000/  
XP driver; this will ensure this driver works properly with  
Windows 2000 and Windows XP.  
If you choose not to find the native driver, test the driver  
thoroughly after it has been installed and initialized.  
Driver does not match OS:  
The .inf file specified for the Windows NT 4.0 driver is not a  
Windows NT 4.0 driver file.  
file _name is not the correct driver information  
file for Windows 4.0. To add a driver for  
Windows NT 4.0, rerun this Add Driver wizard  
and specify the correct driver setup information  
file (*.inf). For more information about drivers,  
consult the online manual.  
You will need to re-run the Add Driver Wizard and either specify  
the correct operating system for this .inf file, or specify a  
Windows NT 4.0 .inf file.  
Driver information not found:  
The name of the printer driver specified in the indicated file does  
not match the name of the printer driver in the other driver .inf  
files being installed.  
The driver information in file_name does not  
match the selected printer model driver_name.  
Please specify another driver setup information  
file (*.inf) for OS. For more details on driver  
name mismatches, refer to the Online Manual.  
If you are trying to install both an NT and a 2K driver, consider  
adding two printers to the PSA: one with the NT driver and the  
second (same printer with a different name) with a 2K driver.  
If you are trying to install a 9x driver and the name does not  
match, it is possible that the driver names provided for different  
operating systems are not the same. If this is the case, please  
Driver Initialization - initialization complete  
Driver Initialization - initialization failed  
Informational.  
In order for drivers to be deployed to client machines via point  
and print, the drivers must be properly initialized. If a driver has  
failed to initialize it will be disabled by the PSA and cannot be  
enabled (but it can be re-installed).  
A disabled driver may still be associated with a printer, but when  
a client tries to install that printer the driver files will not be  
provided by the PSA and the user will be prompted to provide  
the printer driver files.  
Driver Installation Complete  
Driver Initialization Required  
Informational.  
In order for drivers to be deployed to client machines via point  
and print, the drivers must be properly initialized. If a driver has  
failed to initialize it will be disabled by the PSA and cannot be  
enabled (but it can be re-installed).  
A disabled driver may still be associated with a printer, but when  
a client tries to install that printer the driver files will not be  
provided by the PSA and the user will be prompted to provide  
the printer driver files.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error: Driver does not match OS  
The .inf file specified for the selected operating system is  
actually a driver for another operating system. You will need to  
re-run the Add Driver wizard and either specify the correct  
operating system for this .inf file, or specify a .inf file that  
supports your selected operating system.  
.inf_file_name is not the correct driver  
information file for selected_OS. It only  
contains driver information for  
OS_supported_by_.inf. The specified driver will  
NOT be installed. To add a driver for  
selected_OS, rerun this Add Driver wizard and  
specify the correct driver setup information file  
(*.inf). For more information on drivers,  
consult the online manual.  
Error: Driver does not match OS  
The .inf file specified for Windows 9x is actually a driver for  
another operation system. You will need to re-run the Add  
Driver wizard and either specify the operating system supported  
by the selected .inf file, or choose a .inf file that supports  
Windows 9x.  
.inf_filename is not the correct driver  
information file for Windows 9x (Windows 95,  
98, or Me.) It only contains driver information  
for supported_OS. Please specify another driver  
setup information file (*.inf).  
Error: Driver does not match OS  
The .inf file specified for the selected operating system is  
actually a driver for Windows 9x. You will need to re-run the Add  
Driver wizard and either specify Windows 9x as the operating  
system for this .inf file, or specify a .inf file that supports your  
selected operating system.  
.inf_file_name is not the correct driver  
information file for selected_OS. It only  
contains driver information for Windows 9x  
(Windows 95, 98, or Me.) The specified driver  
will NOT be installed. To add a driver for  
selected_OS, rerun this Add Driver wizard and  
specify the correct driver setup information file  
(*.inf). For more information on drivers,  
consult the online manual.  
Initialization Complete  
Informational.  
Informational.  
Informational.  
Informational.  
Initializing: driver_name  
Initializing driver for this version of firmware.  
Initializing Printer Driver  
Install a Windows NT, 2000, or XP Driver First:  
You must install a printer_name driver for  
Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows NT  
4.0 before you install a driver for Windows 9x  
(Windows 95, 98, and Me).  
The PSA has been unable to detect a Windows XP, 2K, or NT  
printer driver to correspond with this 9X driver.  
If a Windows XP, 2K, or NT driver has not yet been  
installed, please install one before or with the specified  
9X driver.  
If a Windows XP, 2K, or NT driver has already been  
installed, it is possible that the driver name of the 9X  
driver does not match that of the higher operating  
systems. Verify that the driver specified is the correct  
driver. If it is the correct driver, please contact HP  
Installing: driver  
Informational.  
Informational.  
Installing Printer Drivers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Invalid Driver Setup Information File:  
file_name could not be read or does not contain  
any printer drivers. Please specify another  
driver setup information file (*.inf).  
The .inf file specified might be corrupted or it might not be a  
driver setup information file.  
Verify that the specified .inf file is a printer setup information file  
and retry. If the problem persists, try a different copy of the  
desired driver or consider using a different driver.  
Invalid Driver Setup Information File:  
The .inf file specified conflicts with the user-specified operating  
system for that file.  
file_name does not contain driver information  
for specified_OS_ name. Please specify another  
driver setup information file (*.inf).  
Verify that the correct operating system was specified with the .  
inf file you are typing.  
Invalid Driver Setup Information File:  
file_name is not the correct file type. This  
application can only install printer drivers using  
*.inf files. Please specify another driver setup  
information file (*.inf).  
The file specified does not have a .inf file name suffix and is not  
viewed as a driver setup information file.  
Verify that the specified file is a driver setup information file with  
the appropriate .inf file name extension and retry.  
Invalid Driver Setup Information File:  
No driver setup information file selected.  
Please enter a driver setup information file (*.  
inf).  
The .inf file name is blank. Complete the file name.  
Keep the existing driver  
Loading  
Skip the installation and keep the driver version that is already  
installed in the PSA.  
Loading the Add Driver Wizard.  
New Driver - Replace Driver?  
A warning message that informs the user that there is already a  
version of the driver installed on the PSA. Asks if he/she would  
like to replace that driver or keep the existing installed version.  
This driver has already been installed. A version  
of this driver is already installed on the print  
server appliance. Do you want to keep the  
existing driver or use the new one?  
Applications may print differently with the new  
driver.  
Optional: Install driver_name drivers for  
additional operating systems. Select the  
operating systems that will need drivers and  
specify the appropriate driver setup  
information files ( .inf files ).  
The user may choose to install drivers for additional operating  
systems.  
Please wait while the driver_name printer  
driver is initialized.  
Informational.  
Informational.  
Informational.  
Informational.  
Informational.  
Please wait while your driver_name printer  
drivers are installed.  
Please wait while your printer drivers are  
initialized.  
Please wait while your printer drivers are  
installed.  
Preparing to install drivers...  
Replace the existing driver  
Replace the driver that is already installed on the PSA with the  
new .inf selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resource Error  
The Add Driver Wizard requires that your system's physical  
This Windows system is either out of memory  
or out of disk space. If it is out of disk space,  
delete some files and try again. If it is out of  
memory, restart the system and try again.  
memory usage be less than 90% and that there is a minimum of  
15MB hard disk space on your client PC in order to execute  
properly. Check your system resources: if you are out of disk  
space, delete some files and run the Add Driver Wizard again.  
If you are out of memory, reboot your system and run the Add  
Driver Wizard again.  
It is possible that the physical memory usage check would still  
fail after a reboot, if there are a lot of applications that start  
automatically upon login. The user might have to shut down  
some applications and try again.  
Security Failure  
In order to install drivers on your PSA, this tool must run an  
application on your client PC. When your browser displays a  
security message asking if you trust content signed by HP, you  
need to grant the requested privileges in order to install drivers.  
The security setting of your browser is too  
restrictive. This applet requires access to run  
an application on your PC and to read and write  
to file system on your PC.  
Sending query to PSA.  
A query is being sent to the PSA to find out which drivers are  
already installed on the PSA.  
Specify the location of the driver setup  
information file (.inf file) and indicate which  
operating system the driver supports.  
In order to install a driver, the user must select a .inf file for the  
printer and OS in question.  
Successfully initialized driver  
Informational.  
The driver you have selected needs to be  
initialized using Java. Your browser doesn't  
have Java, or has disabled Java.  
Before drivers can be installed, Java must be installed and  
JavaScript enabled in your web browser. JavaScript can be  
enabled in Internet Explorer, under:  
To enable Java, change your browser's settings.  
Internet Options-->Security (tab)-->Custom Level (button)--  
>Scripting-->Scripting of Java Applets (subheading)  
If you are using Internet Explorer 6, you  
probably need to download Java. Search the  
Microsoft web site for Q299672 to learn how to  
install Microsoft's Java Component.  
If a Java virtual machine is not installed in the browser, refer to  
Sun Microsystem's web site or to Microsoft's web site for  
information about downloading one. Then make sure the virtual  
machine is turned on. In Internet Explorer, go to:  
Internet Options-->Security (tab)-->Custom Level (button)--  
>Microsoft VM  
Select any option other than "disable".  
This driver has not been initialized yet. To  
ensure that this driver will work properly for  
automatic driver download it needs to be  
In order for drivers to be deployed to client machines using  
point and print, the drivers must be properly initialized.  
initialized. Click  
to continue.  
This driver has now been initialized and is  
enabled for automatic driver download.  
In order for drivers to be deployed to client machines via using  
and print, the drivers must be properly initialized.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unable to initialize driver for this version of  
firmware:  
In order for drivers to be deployed to client machines using  
point and print, the drivers must be properly initialized. If a  
This driver will be disabled for automatic driver  
download. Clients attaching to the printer will  
have to supply their own driver.  
driver has failed to initialize it will be disabled by the PSA and  
cannot be enabled (but it can be re-installed).  
A disabled driver may still be associated with a printer, but when  
a client tries to install that printer the driver files will not be  
provided by the PSA and the user will be prompted to provide  
the printer driver files.  
Unauthorized to Perform this Action:  
You are logged into the PC as : user_name.  
That user does not have administrative or  
power user rights on this PSA. To perform this  
action, you must be logged into Windows with a  
user name that has:  
In order to install printer drivers onto the PSA, they must be  
initialized. In order to run driver initialization, a user must:  
be logged onto their PC with a user account that has  
permission to install programs and administer printing  
on that PC, and  
have a corresponding administrator account on the PSA.  
administrative or power user rights on  
this PC  
administrative rights (a corresponding  
admin account) on the PSA  
Verify that the user account being used has these permissions.  
Then empty your browser's cache , close down all instances of  
your browser, and then restart your browser.  
Unauthorized to Perform this Action:  
You are logged into the PC as : user_name.  
That user does not have administrative rights  
on this PSA. To perform this action, you must  
be logged into Windows with a user name that  
has:  
In order to install printer drivers onto the PSA, they must be  
initialized. In order to run driver initialization, a user must:  
be logged onto their PC with a user account that has  
permission to install programs and administer printing  
on that PC, and  
have a corresponding administrator account on the PSA.  
administrative rights on this PC.  
administrative rights (a corresponding  
admin account) on the PSA.  
Verify that the user account being used has these permissions.  
Then empty your browser's cache , close down all instances of  
your browser, and then restart your browser.  
Windows 9x Driver Name Mismatch  
You have good text for this in your other document.  
The specified Windows 9x setup information  
file does not contain a driver named  
driver_name. Select the driver that you want to  
install for your Windows 9x clients, then click  
. To specify a different Windows 9x  
setup information file, click  
.
Print Shares Page  
Message  
Explanation / Remedy  
Name is a reserved name.  
Active  
That name is reserved for internal use. Retype the name.  
Informational message.  
A printer already exists with the name (name).  
Each printer must have a unique name. Retype the name  
and make sure it's different from any other printer name  
on this PSA.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A print server appliance test page has been queued to  
the (queue) printer queue.  
Confirmation message after  
pressed.  
was  
Attempts to print to the printer failed.  
Cannot be contacted  
A configuration (test) page was requested but LPR was  
not able to print the job on the selected printer. The disk  
space might be full, or the printer might be off or offline.  
The printer cannot be found. It does not respond to a  
network query or ping.  
Changes have been made to the print queue. Please  
apply these changes before printing a test page.  
An attempt was made to print a test page before applying  
the changes made on the print share's Properties page.  
Connected  
Confirmation message.  
Informational message.  
Informational message.  
Disabled  
Door open  
Driver name not found.  
That driver was not found. Choose another driver or  
reinstall this driver.  
Error-Printer unknown  
The status of this printer is unknown. Click  
update the status.  
to  
Insufficient disk space to write file name.  
Internal Error. Try reducing the number of print queues.  
Retype the queue name.  
Invalid Queue Name. Max length is %(len)s,  
disallowed characters are: %(disallowed)s  
Invalid Printer Address  
Printer addresses use the same format as IP addresses or  
hostnames. Retype the printer address using the  
appropriate format.  
For IP addresses: x.x.x.x where the first number is  
between 1 and 255 and the other three numbers are  
between 0 and 255.  
The printer address must be an IP address or a  
hostname. IP address must be in the format xxx.xxx.  
xxx.xxx. Hostnames must be alphanumeric with no  
spaces. Dashes (-) and periods (.) are acceptable.  
For hostnames, use only alphanumeric characters with no  
spaces. Dashes ( - ) and periods ( . ) are acceptable.  
Invalid Print Share Description  
The Print Share Description field is optional. If desired,  
retype the description.  
Printer descriptions can contain alphanumeric  
characters, spaces, dashes (-), underscores (_), plus  
signs (+), commas (,), and periods (.).  
Invalid print share name  
Retype the printer name.  
Print Share names may only contain alphanumeric  
characters, underscores ( _ ), dashes ( - ), periods  
( . ), and question marks ( ? ).  
Low paper  
Informational message.  
Informational message.  
Low toner  
LPD Not Supported  
The LPD protocol is not supported on this printer, and  
therefore it cannot be used with a PSA.  
No paper  
Informational message.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No toner  
Off line  
Informational message.  
Informational message.  
Informational message.  
Informational message.  
Informational message.  
Confirmation message.  
Confirmation message.  
Informational message.  
Confirmation message.  
Online  
Paper jam  
Paused  
printing  
queued  
Service required  
spooling  
The IP Address you entered is the address of this  
PSA. Please enter the name or IP address for the  
printer you wish to add.  
Each printer on the network has a unique IP address. This  
may be the printer's IP address or its DNS hostname. If a  
DNS hostname is being used, a DNS server address must  
be specified for the PSA on the TCP/IP and DNS  
Settings page (on the menu in the web interface under  
under Networking).  
The printer hostname you entered is the same as this  
print server appliance. Please enter the name or IP  
address for the printer you wish to add.  
Each printer on the network should have a unique  
hostname. Retype the name or IP address and make sure  
it is unique.  
The printer you selected was not found.  
An attempt was made to print to a printer that does not  
exist.  
You must specify a printer name for this printer.  
The PSA allows up to 79 characters for the share name.  
However, for any name over 12 characters, Windows  
95/98/ME and older systems might not be able to access  
the share.  
You must specify the address of this printer.  
The printer address can only contain alphanumeric  
characters, spaces, dash (-) underscore (_) plus sign (+)  
ampersand (&), comma (,) and period (.).  
You must specify the remote queue name for this  
printer.  
When Other print server is selected, the Remote  
Queue Name field must be completed. Specify the  
Remote Queue Name of this printer.  
The driver you have selected does not support client  
side rendering.  
A print share is being created and the client side  
rendering box is checked but thie driver is not capable  
of client side rendering.  
NT clients cannot print with drivers using client side  
rendering. If you have NT clients, do not connect  
them to this share or go back and deselect client side  
rendering.  
A print share is being created and the driver selected is  
capable of client side rendering. This is a warning to not  
use drivers capable of client side rendering with NT  
clients.  
Driver Management Page  
Message  
Explanation / Remedy  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Are you sure you want to remove the following  
drivers…?  
One or more drivers were selected and  
was  
pressed. Confirm removal or cancel the operation.  
The HP LaserJet 4 printer driver is essential and  
cannot be deleted.  
The HP LaserJet 4 printer driver is a default driver and  
cannot be deleted.  
The following drivers are in use and cannot be  
deleted.... To delete these drivers, you must either  
delete the printers that use them, or associate a  
different driver with those printers.  
You attempted to delete the listed active driver(s). To  
delete an active driver you must either delete the print  
shares that use it, bind those print shares to a different  
printer driver, or the driver you are deleting must be an  
NT or 2K/XP driver where another (non-9x) version of  
that driver still exists on the PSA.  
Cannot add drivers using this operating system and/  
or browser.  
To add drivers, your PC must be running one of the  
following OSs and browsers:  
An attempt was made to add a driver to the PSA from an  
unsupported platform. A combination of the specified  
operating systems and browsers is needed in order to run  
the driver initialization functionality needed to install a  
new driver on the PSA.  
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows  
XP  
Internet Explorer 5.0 (or above) or Netscape  
4.7 (or above)  
You attempted to delete more than one active driver.  
Only one active driver may be deleted at a time. Only  
the first active driver in the list will be deleted.  
More than one active driver is selected for deletion.  
Active drivers must be deleted one at a time, so that the  
corresponding NT version of the driver can be properly  
initialized.  
Deleting this XP/2K driver will require initialization of  
the NT driver, which requires you to have  
administrative priveleges both on this PC and on the  
PSA.  
An XP/2K driver that is in-use has been selected for  
deletion. You should cancel the delete operation if you do  
not have appropriate priveleges. Then log back in as an  
appropriate user and delete the driver. Or, you can  
proceed with this delete and then log back in as an  
appropriate user later and initialize the driver using the  
Initialize button.  
You attempted to delete the following active CSR  
driver(s): ... To delete an active CSR driver you must  
either turn off Client Side Rendering on the print  
shares that use it, point those shares to a different  
driver, or delete those shares entirely.  
An in-use driver capable of client side rendering is  
selected for deletion. Before if can be deleted, any  
queues using this driver must be deleted or pointed to a  
different driver (including the non-client side rendering  
version of this driver), by unchecking the client side  
rendering box.  
Date / Time Page  
Message  
Explanation / Remedy  
Invalid Date  
Retype the date in mm/dd/yyyy format.  
The date must be in mm/dd/yyyy format.  
Invalid Time  
Retype the time in hh:mm:ss format.  
The time must be entered in the format hh:mm:ss.  
Invalid Time/Date  
The date and/or time fields contain non-numeric  
character(s).  
The date and/or time fields may only contain numbers  
and the specified separator characters. Retype the date  
and/or time using the correct format and characters.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The necessary information to set the date and time  
was not found. The date and/or time fields are blank.  
Complete both fields and click  
Confirmation message.  
.
Your date and time settings have been applied.  
TCP/IP and DNS Settings Page  
Message  
Explanation / Remedy  
DNS server IP address cannot be contacted.  
Informational.  
Gateway is not a valid gateway for IP address IP  
address and subnet mask subnet mask.  
The IP address of the gateway is unreachable with the  
currently assigned PSA IP address and subnet mask.  
Invalid DNS Server Address  
The DNS server address address must be in the  
format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.  
Retype the DNS server address in the xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
format.  
Note: This must be the DNS server's IP address, not its  
friendly name. If the network does not have a DNS  
server, leave this field blank.  
Invalid Domain Name  
The DNS Domain Name must be alphanumeric with no  
spaces. Dashes (-) and periods (.) are acceptable.  
Retype the DNS Domain Name. Use only alphanumeric  
characters with no spaces. Dashes ( - ) and periods ( . )  
are acceptable.  
Invalid Gateway Address  
Gateway addresses are written as four numbers  
separated by periods, where the first number is between  
1 and 255 and the other three numbers are between 0  
and 255. Retype the gateway address in the format xxx.  
xxx.xxx.xxx. If the address is unknown, use the PSA's IP  
address.  
The gateway address must be in the format xxx.xxx.  
xxx.xxx. If the gateway address is unknown, use the  
PSA's IP address.  
Invalid IP Address  
The IP address must be in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.  
IP addresses are written as four numbers separated by  
periods, where the first number is between 1 and 255  
and the other three numbers are between 0 and 255.  
Retype the IP address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.  
Invalid Subnet Mask  
The subnet mask must be in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.  
xxx.  
Subnet masks are written as four numbers separated by  
periods, where the first number is between 1 and 255  
and the other three numbers are between 0 and 255.  
Subnet masks must be well formed to match your  
network.  
Retype the subnet mask in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.  
NAC Internal Error  
Retry the operation.  
Restarting network, please wait.  
Confirmation message.  
Your network settings have been updated.  
This field's value is being assigned by DHCP. If you  
remain in DHCP mode, your changes to this field will  
be lost.  
Self-explanatory.  
Informational.  
WINS server IP address cannot be contacted.  
Microsoft Network Settings Page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Message  
Explanation / Remedy  
Connected  
Confirmation message.  
Invalid administrator name: name  
The administrator name consists of the domainname  
\administratorname or the adminstratorname. The  
administrator portion of the administrator name can be  
up to 20 characters long and include alphanumeric  
characters and the following special characters:  
~ ` ! @ $ % ^ ( ) - _ { } .  
Invalid Domain Controller  
Domain controller names must be alphanumeric with  
no spaces. Dashes (-) and periods (.) are acceptable.  
Retype the Domain Controller Name, using only  
alphanumeric characters with no spaces. The following  
special characters are acceptable:  
dash ( - ), period ( . )  
Invalid domain or workgroup name: name  
Invalid hostname name  
Domain and workgroup names can be up to 15 characters  
long and include alphanumeric characters and the  
following special characters:  
dash (-), period (.), underscore (_)  
The name of the domain controller is invalid. It must be a  
valid IP address, contain up to 255 characters, and  
consist only of alphanumeric characters and the following  
special characters:  
dash (-), period (.), underscore (_), dollar sign ($)  
Invalid password  
The password can be up to 14 characters long and cannot  
include following characters:  
number sign (#), at sign (@)  
Retype the PSA name.  
Invalid PSA Name  
The PSA name must be alphanumeric. Dashes (-) and  
underscores (_) are acceptable. It can be up to 15  
characters long.  
Invalid WINS Server Address (wins address)  
The WINS server address must be in the format xxx.  
xxx.xxx.xxx.  
WINS server addresses are written as four numbers  
separated by periods, where the first number is between  
1 and 255 and the other three numbers are between 0  
and 255. Retype the WINS server address in the format  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The WINS server address and the IP  
address must be in the same format.  
Invalid Workgroup Name (workgroup)  
The workgroup name typed is not valid. Retype the  
workgroup name.  
Joined to domain  
Successfully joined the PSA to the domain.  
Not joined. Cannot contact domain controller(s).  
The PSA did not successfully join the domain, because  
there is difficulty contacting the domain controller.  
Not joined. No account for this device on domain  
controller(s).  
The PSA did not successfully join the domain. No account  
was created for the device. Try retyping the administrator  
name and password and rejoining the domain.  
The domain controller name is not in domain domain  
The domain controller that has been manually specified is  
not part of the domain that the PSA is joined to.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This field's value is being assigned by DHCP. If you  
remain in DHCP mode, your changes to this field will  
be lost.  
Self-explanatory.  
WINS server IP address cannot be contacted.  
Informational.  
Informational.  
WINS server IP address has no entry for this PSA.  
You must specify your domain administrator name  
and password to join the NT domain.  
Specify the Domain Administrator Name and Domain  
Administrator Password  
Your Microsoft networking settings have been updated  
Confirmation message  
LPD Printing Page  
Message  
Explanation / Remedy  
Invalid Hostname  
Hostnames must be alphanumeric characters with no  
spaces. Dashes ( - ) and periods ( . ) are acceptable.  
Retype the hostname using only alphanumeric characters  
with no spaces. Dashes ( - ) and periods ( . ) are  
acceptable.  
Your LPD printing settings have been updated  
Confirmation message  
SNMP Settings Page  
Message  
Explanation / Remedy  
Duplicate IP Address and Port Number  
The trap destination is already in the table.  
Illegal Community Name. Valid characters are  
characters  
Retype the community name using only the valid  
characters.  
Invalid Community Name length. Maximum length is  
length  
The community name must be between 2 and 32  
characters.  
Internal Error - SNMPV3AccountAlreadyInstalled  
The SNMPv3 account has already been created. To delete  
it, uncheck Enable SNMPv3 and then click  
.
Invalid character in Authentication Key. Valid 0-9, a-f,  
A-F  
Retype the Authentication Key using only numbers 0-9  
or characters a-f or A-F.  
Invalid character in Privacy Key. Valid 0-9, a-f, A-F  
Invalid IP Address  
Retype the Privacy Key using only numbers 0-9 or  
characters a-f or A-F.  
IP addresses are written as four numbers separated by  
periods, where the first number is between 1 and 255  
and the other three numbers are between 0 and 255.  
Retype the IP address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.  
Invalid length for Authentication Key  
Invalid length for Privacy Key  
Invalid length for User Name  
The authentication key must be 32 characters long.  
The privacy key must be 32 characters long.  
The user name can be between 2 and 32 characters long.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Invalid Port Number: port number  
The port number must be between 0 and 65535.  
Reapply the last command.  
System call error  
Administrators Page  
Message  
Explanation / Remedy  
Name(s) cannot be contacted.  
The domain controller(s) cannot be contacted. Check that  
you have entered the correct Domain Controller.  
A name is required for the user account.  
Backup  
Type a name for the user account.  
Informational.  
Cannot contact the Domain Controller.  
The domain controller cannot be contacted. Check that  
you have entered the correct Domain Controller.  
Connected.  
Informational.  
Domain account name is too long. Maximum length is:  
Retype the domain account name.  
length  
Domain controller unavailable.  
The domain controller is currently unavailable. Check that  
you have entered the correct Domain Controller.  
Domain controller unavailable. Cached data will be  
returned.  
Informational.  
Incorrect Domain Name or Password.  
Retype the domain name and password.  
Retype the administrator name.  
Invalid Administrator Name  
The Administrator Name must be alphanumeric and  
can contain the following special characters:  
~ ` ! @ $ % ^ ( ) - + { } ' .  
Invalid domain account name: name  
Invalid domain name: name  
Retype the administrator name.  
Retype the administrator name.  
Invalid domain account name. Valid characters are:  
Insufficient disk space to write file name.  
Invalid password set.  
Retype the administrator name.  
Internal Error. Try reducing the number of queues.  
Retype the domain controller password.  
This Domain Admins group cannot be deleted.  
It is not permitted to remove name. The PSA grants  
administrator access to members of this group.  
Joined to domain controller(s).  
Informational.  
No account for this device on the Domain Controller.  
An account must be created on the Domain Controller  
before joining the domain.  
No group or user list returned. Try again or type in  
the name(s).  
No groups or users were returned by the Domain  
Controller. Try again, or type the name manually.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
No password set.  
The domain administrator name or password is incorrect.  
Retype them.  
Not configured.  
Informational.  
Informational.  
Informational.  
Informational.  
No DNS entry for domain controller: name(s).  
No entry in the WINS server for the domain.  
No entry in the WINS server for the Domain  
Controller.  
Passwords don't match  
The password and confirmation do not match.  
Retype the password and confirmation password. Make  
sure the passwords typed in both fields are the same.  
Primary  
Informational.  
The administrator account name and password  
changes have been applied  
Confirmation message.  
The Administrator Name contains invalid characters.  
The allowable characters are characters.  
Retype the Administrator Name.  
Retype the Administrator Name.  
Retype the password.  
The Administrator Name is too long. The maximum  
length is length.  
The Password contains invalid characters. The  
allowable characters are characters.  
The Password is too long. The maximum length is.  
Retype the password.  
length  
Unable to join domain: domain.  
The PSA was unable to join the domain. Check the  
domain name.  
Unknown role.  
Informational.  
SSL Certificate Page  
Message  
Explanation / Remedy  
Invalid common name  
The common name is the fully qualified name or IP  
address of the PSA. This field can contain up to 64  
characters and it cannot be blank (or empty).  
Invalid period  
The period of time that the certificate is valid for could  
not be zero or a negative number.  
Backup, Restore, Upgrade, and Restart Pages  
Message  
Explanation / Remedy  
A downgrade is in process. Please wait until the process  
is complete.  
Informational.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
An I/O Error occurred while transferring the file.  
The specified file name is not a valid upgrade file.  
Retype the file name and try again.  
Another backup, restore, upgrade is already in progress.  
Backup, Restore, Upgrade in progress.  
Informational.  
Informational.  
Error executing setup. Reboot appliance to continue  
upgrading.  
Verify the file is a valid PSA upgrade file and then  
retry the upgrade process.  
Error processing the restore, _or_upgrade_file_name file.  
Verify the file is a valid restore or upgrade file for the  
PSA and then retry the restore process.  
File corruption has been detected the downgrade process  
will not complete.  
Verify the file is a valid PSA file and then retry the  
downgrade process.  
Generating the backup file.  
Informational.  
Internal error. Status = status.  
Verify the file is a valid PSA file and reboot the PSA.  
Then retry the upgrade or restore process.  
Invalid checksum.  
Verify file is a valid PSA file and then retry the  
restore process.  
Invalid file type.  
Verify the file is a valid PSA file and then retry the  
restore process.  
Invalid upgrade, restore file.  
Verify the file is a valid PSA file and then retry the  
upgrade or restore process.  
I/O error generating the backup file.  
I/O error processing the backup file.  
Reboot the PSA and then retry the backup process.  
Verify the the file is a valid PSA file. Then reboot the  
PSA and retry the restore process.  
I/O error transferring file.  
Verify the file is a valid PSA file and then retry the  
process.  
No backup, upgrade file was provided with the restore  
request.  
Retype the file name and retry the restore process.  
Retry the backup process.  
No backup file is available to transfer. Please retry the  
backup process.  
No file was provided with the upgrade request.  
No upgrade file was transferred to the PSA. Retype  
the complete path to the firmware image (for  
example, "C:\TEMP\UPGRADE.HP") or click Browse  
to find the saved firmware image. http://www.hp.  
Retype the file name and path and then retry the  
upgrade process.  
If the file name is unknown, access HP's web site and  
download the upgrade image (http://www.hp.com/  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No restore items were selected. Please select at least one  
item.  
Click at least one option and then continue the  
restore process.  
No upgrade, backup file was provided with the upgrade,  
restore request.  
Type the file name and path and retry the upgrade or  
restore process.  
No upgrade file was provided with the upgrade request.  
No upgrade file was transferred to the PSA. Retype  
the complete path to the firmware image (for  
example, "C:\TEMP\UPGRADE.HP") or click Browse  
to find the saved firmware image.  
Retype the file name and path and retry the upgrade  
process.  
If the file name is unknown, access HP's web site and  
download the upgrade image (http://www.hp.com/  
No upgrade is in progress.  
Type the file name and path and retry the upgrade or  
restore process.  
Not enough disk space. Try again when there are fewer  
print jobs pending.  
Self-explanatory.  
Self-explanatory.  
Not enough disk space for a restore file. Try again when  
there are fewer print jobs pending.  
Please enter a valid path to the upgrade configuration  
file, or click Browse to find the saved upgrade  
configuration file.  
When attempting to restore settings or upgrade the  
firmware, no configuration or upgrade file was  
specified. Type the complete path to the file (for  
example, "C:\TEMP\file.HP") or click Browse to find  
the saved file or firmware image.  
Processing the restore, backup file.  
Rebooting the device.  
Informational message.  
Informational message.  
Status not available - retrying.  
The status is currently not available but will be  
updated in a few moments.  
The backup, restore, upgrade failed.  
Reboot the PSA and then retry the backup, restore,  
or upgrade process.  
The backup, restore, upgrade is blocked.  
Reboot the PSA and then retry the backup, restore,  
or upgrade process.  
The backup file has been restored successfully.  
The backup file is ready to transfer.  
Confirmation message.  
The data has been backed up and is ready to be  
saved to the specified location.  
The configuration file was successfully restored on this  
PSA.  
Confirmation message.  
Confirmation message.  
The restart of the PSA has begun. This system restart will  
take approximately 5-10 minutes. There will not be any  
web notification that the system has been restarted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The specified file is not a valid PSA configuration, upgrade  
file.  
Retype the complete path to the configuration file  
(for example, "C:\TEMP\file.HP") or click Browse to  
find the saved file or firmware image.  
The specified upgrade file cannot be used to upgrade this  
PSA. Please check for a newer upgrade file.  
Verify the file is a valid PSA file whose firmware  
version is later than the current firmware for your  
PSA. Then retry the upgrade process.  
The upgrade file has been transferred successfully. You  
will need to restart your PSA for the upgrade to take  
effect.  
Confirmation message.  
The upgrade has successfully completed.  
The upgrade, etc. is in progress.  
Confirmation message.  
A backup, restore, or upgrade is already in progress.  
Please wait until it is complete before attempting  
another process.  
This appliance cannot be configured, upgraded with this  
upgrade, restore file version. Please check for a newer  
version, upgrade file.  
Verify the file is a valid PSA file and then retry the  
upgrade process.  
Validating the checksum.  
Informational message.  
Event Log Page  
Message  
Explanation / Remedy  
Please select at least one category to view.  
On the Filters page in the Event Log, at least one  
category must be selected:  
Security (SEC)  
Networking (NET)  
Administrative (ADM)  
Please select at least one level to view.  
On the Filters page in the Event Log at least one level  
must be selected:  
Critical (CRIT)  
Error (ERR)  
Informational (INFO)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting the HP Print Server Appliance  
Links within this page:  
Links to related pages:  
Note: Always check the Event Log for messages when troubleshooting a problem with the PSA.  
Hardware Problems  
#
Condition  
Possible Cause/Solution  
1
The PSA does not power  
up.  
Bad power cable or AC outlet. Replace cable and/or verify that the outlet is  
working properly. If the outlet and cable are good, contact HP support to  
replace the unit.  
2
I select DHCP and  
initialization continues.  
However, DHCP No  
The RJ-45 network cables are not connected. Securely connect the  
network cables. If the cable is securely connected, the network LED  
should blink when their is traffic on that network segment  
A DHCP server could not be found on the network. Verify DHCP  
server configuration.  
Reply, Press  
to  
continue appears on the  
LCD display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
The Power On LED is lit,  
but the Network LED does  
not light.  
The RJ-45 network cables are not connected. Securely connect the  
network cables.  
The cable may be faulty. See if another device can communicate on  
the network using the same cable.  
Verify the hub or switch is connected and working properly.  
4
5
The Alert LED is lit.  
The PSA is not fully booted. Wait for the bootup process to complete.  
A critical defect has been detected. Power cycle the unit to see if  
this corrects the problem.  
If the Alert LED stays lit, contact HP support.  
I can't locate the PSA on  
the network.  
Make sure the PSA is configured with an IP address, a subnet mask,  
and a default gateway.  
Make sure the Network LED is lit.  
The RJ-45 network cables are not connected. Securely connect the  
network cables.  
A network hub has lost AC power. Re-establish AC power to the hub.  
The PSA is not powered up. Power up the PSA on and let it boot up.  
For alternative causes/solutions, see Client Setup Problems below.  
At the time the outage occurred:  
6
We had a power outage.  
What do I need to do to  
recover?  
Jobs that were spooled but not yet printing may need to be sent  
again from the client PC, after the PSA has been normally powered  
up again. These jobs should require no action, as they will print  
after the PSA is powered up again.  
Jobs in the middle of printing will resume printing when the PSA is  
powered up again.  
Jobs that were not yet spooled need to be resent.  
If print operations do not appear normal (new jobs do not spool correctly)  
after the outage, then power off the PSA and power it back up again.  
After a power outage or any other improper shutdown, the PSA might  
experience so many errors in its file system that it rebuilds the disk from  
the default image. The printers, network configuration, and drivers will be  
not be automatically restored. The configuration must be restored manually  
using the Restore functionality with the last configuration manually backed  
up.  
Configuration Problems  
Num.  
Condition  
Possible Cause/Solution  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
I can't find the PSA in  
Network Neighborhood.  
The PSA will install itself in the workgroup called workgroup. If  
there are no PCs in this workgroup, the PSA will not show up in  
network neighborhood. Microsoft (R) browsing requires a PC in  
the workgroup to host a browse list. The administrator must  
change the workgroup name through the Web interface on the  
PSA.  
To choose another workgroup name for the PSA:  
1. Access the PSA's web interface by typing the IP address  
in a supported browser window.  
2. Click Microsoft Network Settings page (under  
Networking in the PSA's web interface).  
3. In the window labeled Windows NT Domain or  
Workgroup change the name to the correct workgroup  
name.  
4. Click  
.
A less common cause is that the Master Browser list (Network  
Neighborhood) has not yet been updated with the new PSA.  
Depending on the size and speed of the network, it may take up  
to 30 minutes before the network's master browser list gets  
updated.  
Once this browser list gets updated on the PC that's hosting this  
list, other PCs on the network will check the browser list and be  
able to see any new devices on the network via Network  
Neighborhood.  
To find the PSA more quickly:  
1. Select Start, Find, then Computer.  
2. Type the IP address of the PSA then click Find Now.  
2
3
I can't print a test page  
from the PSA to a printer.  
Incorrect printer IP address or DNS name. Verify or correct the IP  
address.  
Duplicate PSA IP address. Verify or correct the IP address.  
Printer is offline or not present on the network. Verify network  
connectivity by pinging the printer and then place the printer  
online.  
I get browser errors  
when trying to access  
the PSA.  
A browser that is not supported or has known limitations may be in the  
problem. Check the supported web browsers to see if the browser is  
supported.  
4
5
I can't locate the printer  
from the client.  
The client is on a different subnet than the PSA. Verify that WINS is  
configured correctly on the Microsoft Network Settings page.  
How do I know the  
An updated driver will be copied to the client if the driver has the same  
name and a newer version or date. You can verify this by printing a test  
page from the client. The test page will list all the files associated with  
the driver along with version information.  
printer driver I installed  
on the PSA was installed  
on the client? Or how  
can I tell whether the  
updated driver I installed  
on the PSA was  
successfully installed?  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
I am trying to use the  
Properties page in  
Network Neighborhood  
to configure the PSA, but  
the PSA seems to ignore  
some of my settings.  
The PSA uses the printer configuration page on the Printer Properties  
window (which is displayed after right-clicking on a printer and then  
selecting Properties) for driver configuration changes and recognizes  
some other settings, such as security settings. However, the PSA does  
not recognize many of the settings if they are changed using these driver  
management tools.  
General tab  
Comments text field - supported  
Location text field - supported  
Driver drop-down list- the driver can be changed if and  
only if the driver is an initialized driver; otherwise, the  
administrator will be prompted to change the driver  
through the PSA's web interface so that the driver can be  
initialized.  
New Driver button - the driver can be uploaded to the  
PSA, but will not be associated with this printer until the  
administrator uses the PSA's web interface to change the  
driver so that it can be initialized.  
Separator Page button - not supported  
Print Processor button - not supported  
Print Test Page button - supported  
Ports tab (all buttons are disabled for remote printers)  
Enable bi-directional support check box - not supported  
Enable printer pooling check box - not supported  
Scheduling tab  
Availability - should be left on "Always"; print jobs  
submitted during unavailable time will be deleted and not  
spooled.  
Priority scale - not supported  
Spool print document so program finishes printing faster  
toggle - supported  
Print directly to the printer toggle - supported  
Hold mismatched documents check box - not supported  
Print spooled documents first check box - not supported  
(the PSA always uses this behavior)  
Keep documents after they have printed check box - not  
supported  
Sharing tab  
Not Shared toggle - not supported (may be selected but  
will be ignored)  
Shared toggle - supported  
Share Name text field - not supported  
Alternate Drivers - not supported  
Security tab  
Permissions button - supported  
Auditing button - not supported  
Ownership button - not supported  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
I keep getting prompted  
for a password when I  
use a web browser to  
access the PSA even  
though the PSA is a  
Whether you get prompted for a password and what the password  
prompt looks like are a function of your web browser and its  
configuration. If the PSA is a member of a domain, it will always ask your  
browser to use your existing Windows Domain authentication. Microsoft's  
Internet Explorer uses a concept of security zones to determine whether  
the web server (in this case, the PSA) is within the "Intranet Zone".  
There are a number of ways to include the PSA in the "Intranet Zone",  
but the easiest is to open:  
member of a domain.  
Tools--> Internet Options-->Connections-->LAN Settings-->Advanced  
and type the full name, the IP address, and the short name in the  
"Exceptions" box. This will cause Microsoft's Internet Explorer to connect  
directly with the PSA and avoid your proxy server. By default, Internet  
Explorer considers direct connections in the "Intranet Zone". Consult  
your Microsoft Internet Explorer documentation to determine other ways  
to include the PSA in the "Intranet Zone". If you are using proxy servers  
in your environment and you want to use the single sign-on functionality,  
your web browser will need to be set up to bypass the proxy server for  
the PSA's host name (if it includes periods) and IP address. An  
administrator can view or change their local Intranet settings in the  
Internet Options page under the Security tab by selecting Local Intranet  
and clicking on the Sites button.  
Note: The single sign-on feature of the PSA only works with Microsoft's  
Internet Explorer.  
8
I want to use a hyphen  
in the beginning of some  
of my PSA names, so  
that they will print first in  
a list of PSAs.  
The PSA name (entered on the Microsoft Networking Settings page) can  
contain up to 15 alphanumeric characters. It may also contain dashes  
( - ) and underscores (_). (The hostname cannot begin with a hyphen  
(-), but it can have a hyphen within the name. The hyphen cannot be the  
first character because the PSA name is is also used for the DNS name  
generation, and the hyphen character is not allowed as the first character  
in a DNS name.)  
9
I have a Windows 2000  
environment and I am  
trying to integrate my  
PSAs into it.  
The PSA can use a Windows 2000 system for authorization and  
participate in a Windows 2000 domain in much the same manner as an  
NT 4.0 server can. The Windows 2000 system must be configured to  
support NTLM V1, which is a version of the authorization protocol used  
by Windows system.  
10  
I have a non-HP print  
server I am trying to use  
with my PSA. Will this  
work?  
Yes, if the printer supports LPD. You may have to know the proper LPD  
remote queue name for the print server. Many print servers will work  
without specifying a remote queue name (use the default HP PRINT  
SERVER setting); however, some require a special string in order to  
work. The LPD remote queue name can be obtained from the print server  
vendor.  
11  
12  
I am trying to configure  
the PSA using TELNET.  
Will this work?  
No. You can assign IP addresses via DHCP, the front panel, and a web  
browser. After an IP address is assigned, you must use a web browser to  
finish configuring the PSA.  
The Network  
Neighborhood browser  
has not yet updated.  
Try accessing the PSA by selecting Start from the task bar, and select  
Find and Computer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
I get prompted for a  
password when I use a  
web browser to access  
the PSA even though the  
PSA is a member of a  
domain.  
Whether you get prompted for a password and what the password  
prompt looks like are a function of your web browser and its  
configuration. If the PSA is a member of a domain, it will always ask your  
browser to use your existing Windows Domain authentication. Microsoft's  
Internet Explorer uses a concept of security zones to determine whether  
the web server (in this case, the PSA) is within the "Intranet Zone".  
There are a number of ways to include the PSA in the "Intranet Zone",  
but the easiest is to open:  
Tools--> Internet Options-->Connections-->LAN Settings-->Advanced  
and enter the full name, the IP address, and the short name in the  
"Exceptions" box. This will cause Microsoft's Internet Explorer to connect  
directly with the PSA and avoid your proxy server. By default, Internet  
Explorer considers direct connections in the "Intranet Zone". Consult  
your Microsoft Internet Explorer documentation to determine other ways  
to include the PSA in the "Intranet Zone".  
If you are using proxy servers in your environment and you want to use  
the single sign-on functionality, your web browser will need to be set up  
to bypass the proxy server for the PSA's host name (if it includes  
periods) and IP address. An administrator can view or change their local  
intranet settings in the Internet Options page under the Security tab by  
selecting Local Intranet and clicking on the Sites button.  
Note: The single sign-on feature of the PSA only works with Microsoft's  
Internet Explorer.  
Printing Problems  
Num.  
Condition  
Possible Cause/Solution  
1
I can't print from a client  
to the intended printer,  
although I have done so  
previously.  
The selected printer may be paused. Unpause the printer.  
Wait a moment and then resend the print job, which should then  
be printed successfully.  
Go to the Printers Management Page and see if any print queues  
have an inordinate number of jobs waiting to be printed. If the  
jobs do not seem to be printing, delete a few and try sending a  
new job.  
If NT Domain Security is enabled, the security settings may have  
changed. Verify that the user has authority to print. This can be  
done from the PSA's web interface by selecting Print Shares-  
>Security. By default, the group "Everyone" has permission to  
print. If "Everyone" does not have permission to print, add it.  
The PSA may be unable to communicate with a domain controller  
in order to verify the clients ID and password. Check the Domain  
page to verify that the PSA can communicate with the domain  
controller.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
I have not been able to  
print from any client to  
the intended printer.  
The IP address or printer name may not be correctly configured  
for the desired printer. Verify that the PSA can print to the  
printer by using the "print test page" functionality of the printer  
property page in the web interface of the PSA. If the test page  
does not print, there is a problem in the communication between  
the PSA and the printer. See more information about the TCP/IP  
page.  
The PSA may be unable to communicate with a domain controller  
in order to verify the clients ID and password. Check the Domain  
page to verify that the PSA can communicate with the domain  
controller.  
If NT Domain Security is enabled, the security settings may have  
changed. Verify that the user has authority to print. This can be  
done from the PSA's web interface by selecting Print Shares-  
>Security. By default, the group Everyone has permission to  
print. If Everyone does not have permission to print, add it.  
If NT Domain Security is enabled, verify that the group  
Everyone exists in the domain.  
3
4
5
The printer's Property  
page in Network  
Neighborhood does not  
work properly. An error  
message appears  
whenever a change is  
accepted.  
The user you are logged in as may not have the appropriate permissions  
to perform the operation. For NT Domain security, verify that the user  
you are logged in as is a member of the Domain Administrators group.  
If you are not using NT Domain security, verify that there is an  
administrator account on the PSA with the same name and password as  
the user that you are logged in as.  
A printer had to be taken  
off the network for  
repair, and it was  
replaced by one having a  
different IP address.  
Print jobs reach the  
queue but never print.  
Open a web browser, point it at the PSA, and select the Print Shares  
page. Select the Properties page for that printer. Change the IP address  
or DNS host name for the printer and click  
. If the printer was  
stopped in the middle of a print job, that job will be lost, but any other  
jobs in the queue will now print to the new printer.  
The PSA is set up to use  
DHCP. When I powered it  
off and then powered it  
back up again, DHCP  
reassigned it to a  
different IP address than  
it had previously. Now  
the clients can no longer  
print. How can I avoid  
this?  
Use a WINS server along with DHCP, so that when the PSA powers up it  
will always be reassigned the same IP address.  
If you are not using WINS, you may alternatively set the PSA IP address  
manually and have the DHCP administrator select an IP Address Pool  
range which excludes the PSA address.  
Or, have the DHCP administrator supply the PSA with an "infinite lease"  
duration for its assigned IP address.  
6
I changed the printer  
name and now the  
clients cannot print.  
Use the Windows Add Printer wizard at the clients and enter or browse  
to the new printer name. Also, delete the client's old printer driver which  
referred to the previous printer name.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
8
The status of a print job  
is Unknown on the  
Jobs page for that  
printer in the web  
interface.  
Delete the print job and resend it.  
I am trying to print a  
large print file. Is there a  
maximum size of print  
job that the PSA will  
handle?  
There is no limit for a file size that the PSA can handle.  
9
There are a lot of jobs  
spooled on the PSA. Is  
there a limit?  
Up to 10,000 jobs can be spooled at a time, which might be further  
restricted by the disk space available on the PSA.  
10  
I am trying to print in  
Landscape mode, Duplex  
mode, or multiple copies,  
but the margins are  
offset.  
If you have not done so, upgrade your firmware to version 2.4.x and  
initialize the driver for that printer.  
Delete the print driver from the computer and delete the port created for  
it. Install the print driver on the computer as a network printer and  
browse to the print queue on the PSA.  
11  
The performance of the  
PSA is very slow when  
connecting to the PSA  
via Network  
Neighborhood or when  
opening a printer's  
Property Page in Network  
Neighborhood.  
Several workarounds or solutions are available. Performance issues can  
be subjective. If printing seems to be slow using the PSA, compare  
printing through some other means (such as an LPR port on the  
workstation that prints directly to the printer's IP address). A comparison  
helps to identify general network, printer, or application problems versus  
specific print server PSA problems.  
revision (2.4.x or newer) should fix the following conditions:  
Slow printing/performance - At first printing is fast,  
afterwards printing seems to be very slow. Turning the  
print PSA off then on seems to help.  
Slow Web Pages - When attempting to access or make  
changes to the Web page for the PSA, the Web pages are  
very slow.  
Locks up - PSA locks up or is unable to print. Turning  
the PSA off and then on seems to help.  
Verify the configuration of the DNS server with the network  
administrator. An incorrectly configured entry on the DNS server  
for the PSA can cause delays:  
connecting to a printer in Network Neighborhood  
delays displaying the Property page in Network  
Neighborhood  
in printing  
The PSA must have a correctly configured DNS server and the  
PSA requires entries in both the DNS server's forward and  
reverse lookup tables. If the DNS server is not configured  
properly, when a computer tries to connect to the PSA through  
Network Neighborhood, it could take one to two minutes while  
the PSA tries to communicate with the DNS server.  
Verify the DNS lookup tables using the following steps:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
At the command prompt of a Windows NT or Windows 2000  
computer, type the following commands:  
The following command verifies an entry for the PSA  
name: nslookup printappliancename.domain DNS  
server IP address (For example: nslookup mypsa.usa  
192.168.100.90)  
If the name lookup does not reply with the PSA's IP  
address, that means there is no entry for the PSA in the  
DNS server's Forward Lookup table. The Forward Lookup  
table is the table the DNS server uses to determine the  
IP address based on the DNS name.  
The following command verifies an entry for the PSA's IP  
address: nslookup printappliance IP Address DNS  
server IP address (For example: nslookup  
192.168.100.80 192.168.100.90)  
If the IP address lookup does not reply with the PSA  
name, it means there is no entry for the PSA in the DNS  
server's Reverse Lookup table. The Reverse Lookup table  
is the table the PSA uses to find a system's name based  
on its IP address.  
Check the PSA's Microsoft Network Settings page (under  
Networking in the PSA's web interface). If the Specified NT  
Domain Controllers settings show the host name of the domain  
server, use the IP address of the server instead. If Manually  
specify NT Domain Controllers is selected, try selecting  
Automatically discover NT Domain Controllers instead.  
As a test, try the following: Check the PSA's Microsoft Network  
Settings page (by opening the PSA's web interface). If the PSA  
is configured to Enable NT Domain Authentication (so that it  
is joining the domain), re-configure it so that it does not join a  
domain, then see if printing is faster. If it is consistently faster  
when not joined to the domain than when it is, be sure that the  
print server has the most current firmware (use the link above).  
If it is possible to use the PSA when it is not joined to a domain,  
do so temporarily, then contact HP support.  
Check the PSA's Microsoft Network Settings page (under  
Networking in the PSA's web interface). If the PSA is configured  
to use a WINS Server Address, make sure that address is  
correct. If it is, type the following command at the command  
prompt of a Windows NT or Windows 2000 computer:  
nbtstat -a PSA_hostname  
(where PSA_hostname is the host name of your PSA)  
The response should include three to five entries. If the response  
is a host not found message, there may be a problem with the  
WINS server. Contact your network administrator for this  
problem.  
12  
Jobs are getting stuck on  
the PSA for one of my  
printers.  
The PSA uses LPD to send print jobs to its printers. If the print server  
connecting a printer to the network does not support LPD, jobs for that  
printer will get stuck on the PSA. You may need to upgrade the firmware  
of the offending print server or it may need to be replaced with a print  
server that supports LPD.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
HP LaserJet print jobs  
are missing text of  
graphics, or are printing  
garbage.  
It is strongly recommend that the PSA's firmware be upgraded to latest  
(2.4.x or newer) to alleviate problems with printer drivers. Click here to  
Remove the printer driver from the PSA and from any computer printing  
to that printer. Download the latest printer driver form the HP Web site  
and install it on the PSA.  
14  
15  
The Xerox Document  
Center 265ST fails to  
print from the PSA. Print  
jobs hang in the queue.  
These Xerox printers use their own print server cards that require the  
remote name to be lp (in lower case only). In Printer Properties,  
Other print server must be selected. The Remote Queue Name must  
be lp (lower case).  
I'm unable to see any  
advanced printing  
options in the Print  
Preferences pages on 2K  
or XP clients.  
Newer Windows 2K and XP drivers now use a new print driver  
architecture. This new architecture is not compatible with the PSA  
firmware 2.3.252 or older. Upgrade the PSA firmware to 2.5.XX and  
reload the 2K/XP printer driver. Select the option "Use client side  
rendering".  
16  
I am having problems  
printing advance features  
like Watermark, N-up,  
Rotate 180*, back to  
front, Booklet...or other  
advanced printing  
Newer Windows 2K and XP drivers now use a new print driver  
architecture. This new architecture is not compatible the PSA firmware  
2.3.252 or older. Upgrade the PSA firmware to 2.5.x and reload the 2K/  
XP printer driver. Select the option "Use client side rendering".  
features.  
Printer Driver Problems  
Num.  
Condition  
Possible Cause/Solution  
1
I can't install the  
Your Windows 9x driver may not have the same name in its .inf file as  
the Windows NT, 2K, or XP drivers. Please contact HP support.  
Windows 9x driver for a  
printer for which I  
already have a Windows  
NT, 2K, or XP driver  
installed.  
2
I am using Internet  
Before drivers can be installed, Java must be installed and JavaScript  
enabled in your web browser. JavaScript can be enabled in Internet  
Explorer, under:  
Explorer 6 and am trying  
to install and initialize a  
driver. I keep getting a  
message about Java  
having to be turned on.  
How do I do this?  
Internet Options-->Security (tab)-->Custom Level (button)-->Scripting--  
>Scripting of Java Applets (subheading)  
If a Java virtual machine is not installed in the browser, refer to Sun  
Microsystem's web site or to Microsoft's web site for information about  
downloading one. Then make sure the virtual machine is turned on. In  
Internet Explorer, go to:  
Internet Options-->Security (tab)-->Custom Level (button)-->Microsoft  
VM  
Select any option other than "disable".  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
I am trying to add a  
In order to install drivers onto the PSA, a user must be logged onto their  
PC with a user account that has permission to install software on that  
PC, and have a corresponding administrator account on the PSA. If NT  
domain authentication is enabled (on the Microsoft Network Settings  
printer driver to the PSA,  
but I keep getting the  
error: Unauthorized to  
perform this action.  
page), administrator accounts on the PSA can be set up on the  
interface under Security). If NT domain authentication is not enabled,  
the user must set up a local administrator account on the PSA, with a  
name and password that matches their NT user account.  
4
5
I added a Windows 2000  
driver to the PSA, but it  
did not show up in the  
driver list.  
Drivers for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 usually work with both Windows  
2000 and Windows XP. Consequently, many vendors will label a driver  
as Windows 2000 or XP when the driver conforms to the NT 4.0 driver  
specification. As a result, Windows 2000 drivers can show up as  
Windows NT drivers.  
I added a Windows XP  
driver to the PSA, but it  
did not show up in the  
driver list.  
Drivers for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 usually work with both Windows  
2000 and Windows XP. Consequently, many vendors will label a driver  
as Windows 2000 or XP when the driver conforms to the NT 4.0 driver  
specification. Since there is no unique XP driver specification, drivers  
labeled by a printer vendor for XP will always appear as either NT 4.0 or  
Windows 2000 drivers.  
6
I am having problems  
with Windows 2K and XP  
drivers.  
Problems with Windows 2K and XP drivers can include:  
N-up (printing multiple pages in a reduced format on one page)  
booklet style (format the print job into a printed booklet)  
watermark (print a watermark on each page of the document)  
ZoomSmart (scales a letter-sized/A4 document or poster to  
tabloid/A3, or vice versa)  
back-to-front (prints the document in reverse order)  
rotate 180 degrees (rotates the document layout but not the  
paper)  
If you are having problems with any of these features, first update the  
firmware. If the problem persists, reinstall the driver and select the "Use  
client side rendering with this driver" checkbox when selecting the driver  
to use with the print share. The problem should then be resolved.  
7
8
I cannot point and print  
a printer driver from the  
PSA onto my NT client  
PC.  
If you are running version 2.5.XX of the PSA firmware, make sure Client  
Side Rendering (CSR) is not selected for the particular printer driver you  
are using. CSR drivers are only compatible with 2K or XP clients. If you  
have a combination of 2K/XP clients and NT clients, either create  
separate print queues for each platform, or create a single queue and  
only use the NT driver.  
Special printing property  
options like Watermark,  
N-up, Back to Front,  
Zoomsmart, and rotate  
180 degrees do not show  
up on the printer pages.  
Newer Windows 2K and XP drivers now use a new print driver  
architecture. This new architecture is not compatibe the PSA firmware  
2.3.252 or older. Upgrade the PSA firmware to 2.5.XX and reload the 2K/  
XP printer driver. Select the option to "Use client side rendering".  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security Problems  
If the PSA is joined to a domain, the domain password for the domain controller is included in the backup file. When  
that PSA backup file is restored, it might be necessary to join the PSA to that domain again because the password  
might have changed since the backup file was created.  
About the Indicator Lights (LEDs)  
There are four indicator lights (LEDs) on the front of the PSA.  
LED Normal Conditions  
LED  
LED Name  
Power LED  
Description  
ON when power is supplied to the PSA and it is turned on.  
Network  
Activity  
LED  
LIT when there is a connection between the PSA and other  
network devices.  
BLINKS when there is network activity between the PSA and  
other network devices.  
Disk  
ON when there is disk activity on the PSA.  
Activity  
LED  
Alert LED  
OFF during normal operations (ON during bootup and shutdown).  
LED Problem Conditions  
Condition  
Possible Cause/Solution  
Power LED is not lit.  
Power failure. Restore AC power. Bad power cord or power cord  
unplugged. Verify and replace cord.  
Network LED never  
blinks.  
Network connection is bad. Verify network cable connections, replace  
cable.  
Alert LED remains  
lit after bootup is  
completed.  
Critical failure is detected. Note the message on LCD front panel.  
Power cycle the unit. If the problem persists, contact HP support.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer Driver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Outages  
Answers  
Configuration  
1. Can I use Web Jetadmin to manage my PSA?  
Yes, With Web JetAdmin 7.2 (and above), and the downloadable PSA plugins for WJA , you can now  
configure and manage all of your PSAs that are running on the 2.4.X version of firmware. Features include  
the ability to schedule backups and firmware upgrades after hours, pushing printer drivers to multiple PSAs  
simultaneously, and setting traps and alerts for different events.  
2. Does the PSA support bootp or rarp?  
No, but the PSA does support DHCP.  
3. What features on the Properties Page in Network Neighborhood are supported by the PSA?  
The PSA uses the printer configuration page on the Printer Properties window (which is displayed after right-  
clicking on a printer and then selecting Properties) for driver configuration changes and recognizes some  
other settings, such as security settings. However, the PSA does not recognize many of the settings if they  
are changed using these driver management tools.  
General tab  
Comments text field - supported  
Location text field - supported  
Driver dropdown - the driver can be changed if and only if the driver is an initialized driver;  
otherwise, the administrator will be prompted to change the driver through the PSA's web  
interface so that the driver can be initialized.  
New Driver button - the driver can be uploaded to the PSA, but will not be associated with  
this printer until the administrator uses the PSA's web interface to change the driver so that  
it can be initialized.  
Separator Page button - not supported  
Print Processor button - not supported  
Print Test Page button - supported  
Ports tab (all buttons are disabled for remote printers)  
Enable bi-directional support check box - not supported  
Enable printer pooling check box - not supported  
Scheduling tab  
Availability - should be left on "Always"; print jobs submitted during unavailable time will be  
deleted and not spooled.  
Priority scale - not supported  
Spool print document so program finishes printing faster toggle - supported  
Print directly to the printer toggle - supported  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Hold mismatched documents check box - not supported  
Print spooled documents first check box - not supported (the PSA always uses this behavior)  
Keep documents after they have printed check box - not supported  
Sharing tab  
Not Shared toggle - not supported (may be selected but will be ignored)  
Shared toggle - supported  
Share Name text field - not supported  
Alternate Drivers - not supported  
Security tab  
Permissions button - supported  
Auditing button - not supported  
Ownership button - not supported  
4. Can I use a hyphen in the PSA name?  
The PSA name (entered on the Microsoft Network Settings page) can contain up to 15 alphanumeric  
characters. It may also contain dashes ( - ) and underscores (_). (The hostname cannot begin with a  
hyphen (-), but it can have a hyphen within the name. The hyphen cannot be the first character because  
the PSA name is is also used for the DNS name generation, and the hyphen character is not allowed as the  
first character in a DNS name.)  
5. Can the PSA integrate into a Windows 2000 environment?  
The PSA can use a Windows 2000 system for authorization and participate in a Windows 2000 domain in  
much the same manner as an NT 4.0 server can. The Windows 2000 system must be configured to support  
NTLM V1, which is a version of the authorization protocol used by Windows system.  
6. Can the PSA be configured via TELNET?  
No. You can assign IP addresses via DHCP, the front panel, and a web browser. After an IP address is  
assigned, you must use a web browser to finish configuring the PSA.  
7. Is the PSA compatible with non-HP print servers?  
Yes. Any print server that supports LPD should work with the PSA. You may have to know the proper LPD  
remote queue name for the print server. Many print servers will work without specifying a remote queue  
name (use the default HP PRINT SERVER setting); however, some require a special string in order to work.  
The LPD remote queue name can be obtained from the print server vendor.  
8. The PSA does not show up in Network Neighborhood.  
The PSA will install itself in the workgroup called workgroup. If there are no PCs in this workgroup,  
the PSA might not show up in network neighborhood. Microsoft (R) browsing requires a PC in the  
workgroup to host a browse list. The administrator must change the workgroup name through the  
Web interface on the PSA.  
To choose another workgroup name for the PSA:  
1. Access the PSA's web interface by typing the IP address in a supported browser window.  
2. Click Microsoft Network Settings page (under Networking in the PSA's web interface).  
3. In the window labeled Windows NT Domain or Workgroup change the name to the  
correct workgroup name.  
4. Click  
.
A less common cause is that the Master Browser list (Network Neighborhood) has not yet been  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
updated with the new PSA. Depending on the size and speed of the network, it may take up to 30  
minutes before the network's master browser list gets updated.  
Once this browser list gets updated on the PC that's hosting this list, other PCs on the network will  
check the browser list and be able to see any new devices on the network via Network  
Neighborhood.  
To find the PSA more quickly:  
1. Select Start, Find, then Computer.  
2. Type the IP address of the PSA then click Find Now.  
Printing  
1. Is there a maximum size print job I can send to the PSA?  
There is no limit for a file size that the PSA can handle.  
2. How does the PSA work with my existing print spooling strategy?  
It can offload printing tasks from servers and localize print traffic at remote sites. For details, see the  
3. What is the Microsoft Point and Print feature and how does it work?  
Point and Print is a Microsoft term to describe the automatic installation of drivers on the printer client. It  
involves two steps. The first step is installing a shared driver on a network print server or print server PSA.  
The second step is "pointing" to the print server or PSA from a network client for driver installation on the  
client. This process is also sometimes described as a network installation of a printer driver.  
4. Can the PSA accept print jobs from UNIX clients?  
Print jobs are accepted from HP-UX, Solaris, and any other RFC 1179-compliant LPD clients. To set up LPD  
printing, go to the LPD page in the PSA's web interface (under Network Settings).  
5. Can I print in a Novell environment?  
Yes. If the Microsoft networking client is loaded and the IP address is properly configured on the client and  
printer, then the PSA can be used. However, the PSA will not appear as a Bindery object or as an NDS  
object on the Novell server.  
6. What is the limit on the number of jobs that can be spooled?  
Up to 10,000 jobs can be spooled at a time, which might be further restricted by the disk space available on  
the PSA.  
7. How are print jobs sent to the PSA?  
Clients send print jobs via SMB or LPD to the PSA. SMB (Server Message Block) is the normal Microsoft  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
networking protocol. LPD (Line Printer Daemon) is an Internet standard (RFC 1179) supported by many  
operating systems.  
8. How are print jobs sent from the PSA to the printer?  
The PSA uses LPD to send the print job to the printer.  
9. I am trying to print in Landscape mode, Duplex mode, or multiple copies, but the margins are  
offset.  
If you have not done so, upgrade your firmware to version 2.4.x and initialize the driver for that printer.  
Delete the print driver from the computer and delete the port created for it. Install the print driver on the  
computer as a network printer and browse to the print queue on the PSA.  
10. Why is the performance so slow when connecting to the PSA via Network Neighborhood or when  
opening a printer's Property Page in Network Neighborhood?  
Several workarounds or solutions are available. Performance issues can be subjective. If printing seems to  
be slow using the PSA, compare printing through some other means (such as an LPR port on the  
workstation that prints directly to the printer's IP address). A comparison helps to identify general network,  
printer, or application problems versus specific print server appliance problems.  
The latest firmware revision (2.4.x or newer) should fix the following conditions:  
Slow printing/performance - At first printing is fast, afterwards printing seems to be  
very slow. Turning the print appliance off then on seems to help.  
Slow Web Pages - When attempting to access or make changes to the Web page for the  
print appliance, the Web pages are very slow.  
Locks up - Print appliance locks up or is unable to print. Turning the print appliance off  
then on seems to help.  
Verify the configuration of the DNS server with the network administrator. An incorrectly configured  
entry on the DNS server for the PSA can cause delays:  
connecting to a printer in Network Neighborhood  
delays displaying the Property page in Network Neighborhood  
in printing  
The PSA must have a correctly configured DNS server and the print server appliance requires  
entries in both the DNS server's forward and reverse lookup tables. If the DNS server is not  
configured properly, when a computer tries to connect to the print server appliance through  
Network Neighborhood, it could take one to two minutes while the print server appliance tries to  
communicate with the DNS server.  
Verify the DNS lookup tables using the following steps:  
At the command prompt of a Windows NT or Windows 2000 computer, type the following  
commands:  
The following command verifies an entry for the PSA name: nslookup  
printappliancename.domain DNS server IP address (For example: nslookup mypsa.usa  
192.168.100.90)  
If the name lookup does not reply with the PSA's IP address, that means there is no entry  
for the PSA in the DNS server's Forward Lookup table. The Forward Lookup table is the table  
the DNS server uses to determine the IP address based on the DNS name.  
The following command verifies an entry for the PSA's IP address: nslookup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
printappliance IP Address DNS server IP address (For example: nslookup  
192.168.100.80 192.168.100.90)  
If the IP address lookup does not reply with the print server appliance name, it means there  
is no entry for the print server appliance in the DNS server's Reverse Lookup table. The  
Reverse Lookup table is the table the print server appliance uses to find a system's name  
based on its IP address.  
Check the PSA's Microsoft Network Settings page (under Networking in the PSA's web  
interface). If the Specified NT Domain Controllers settings show the host name of the domain  
server, use the IP address of the server instead. If Manually specify NT Domain Controllers is  
selected, try selecting Automatically discover NT Domain Controllers instead.  
As a test, try the following: Check the PSA's Microsoft Network Settings page (by opening the  
PSA's web interface). If the PSA is configured to Enable NT Domain Authentication (so that it is  
joining the domain), re-configure it so that it does not join a domain, then see if printing is faster. If  
it is consistently faster when not joined to the domain than when it is, be sure that the print server  
has the most current firmware (use the link above). If it is possible to use the print appliance when  
it is not joined to a domain, do so temporarily, then contact HP support.  
Check the PSA's Microsoft Network Settings page (under Networking in the PSA's web  
interface). If the PSA is configured to use a WINS Server Address, make sure that address is  
correct. If it is, type the following command at the command prompt of a Windows NT or Windows  
2000 computer:  
nbtstat -a PSA_hostname  
(where PSA_hostname is the host name of your PSA)  
The response should include three to five entries. If the response is a host not found message,  
there may be a problem with the WINS server. Contact your network administrator for this problem.  
11. Jobs are getting stuck on the PSA for one of my printers.  
The PSA uses LPD to send print jobs to its printers. If the print server connecting a printer to the network  
does not support LPD, jobs for that printer will get stuck on the PSA. You may need to upgrade the firmware  
of the offending print server or it may need to be replaced with a print server that supports LPD.  
12. HP LaserJet print jobs are missing text of graphics, or are printing garbage.  
It is strongly recommend that the OSA's firmware be upgraded to latest (2.4.x or newer) to alleviate  
Remove the printer driver from the PSA and from any computer printing to that printer. Download the latest  
printer driver form the HP Web site and install it on the PSA.  
13. The Xerox Document Center 265ST fails to print from the PSA. Print jobs hang in the queue.  
These Xerox printers use their own print server cards that require the remote name to be lp (in lower case  
only). only). In Printer Properties, Other print server must be selected. The Remote Queue Name  
must be lp (lower case).  
Printer Drivers  
1. I can't install the Windows 9x driver for a printer for which I already have a Windows NT, 2K, or  
XP driver installed.  
Your Windows 9x driver may not have the same name in its .inf file as the Windows NT, 2K, or XP drivers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. I am using Internet Explorer 6 and am trying to install and initialize a driver. I keep getting a  
message about Java having to be turned on. How do I do this?  
Before drivers can be installed, Java must be installed and JavaScript enabled in your web browser.  
JavaScript can be enabled in Internet Explorer, under:  
Internet Options-->Security (tab)-->Custom Level (button)-->Scripting-->Scripting of Java Applets  
(subheading)  
If a Java virtual machine is not installed in the browser, refer to Sun Microsystem's web site or to  
Microsoft's web site for information about downloading one. Then make sure the virtual machine is turned  
on. In Internet Explorer, go to:  
Internet Options-->Security (tab)-->Custom Level (button)-->Microsoft VM  
Select any option other than "disable".  
3. I am going to upgrade to firmware version 2.4.x. Will my printer drivers have to be initialized  
again?  
If migrating to firmware version 2.4.x, printers that had been added to earlier firmware versions (2.3.x or  
before) need to be associated with their driver again. To do this easily, use either the PSA's web interface or  
Web Jetadmin.  
In the PSA's web interface: go to the Print Shares page (on the menu in the web interface under Print  
Services) and then click  
(Drivers). In the drop-down list, select any other driver and click  
again.  
.
Then, select the original driver and click  
In Web Jetadmin under Driver Management, access the Printer Drivers page and click the Initialize  
button. Select the appropriate driver and click the Initialize button again.  
4. I am trying to add a printer driver to the PSA, but I keep getting an "unauthorized to perform  
this action" error message.  
In order to install drivers onto the PSA, a user must be logged onto their PC with a user account that has  
permission to install software on that PC, and have a corresponding administrator account on the PSA. If NT  
domain authentication is enabled (on the Microsoft Networking Settings page), administrator accounts on  
the PSA can be set up on the Domain Account page (in the PSA's web interface under Admin Accounts). If  
NT domain authentication is not enabled, the user must set up a local administrator account on the PSA,  
with a name and password that matches their NT user account.  
5. I added a Windows 2000 driver to the PSA, but it did not show up in the driver list.  
Drivers for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 usually work with both Windows 2000 and Windows XP. Consequently,  
many vendors will label a driver as Windows 2000 or XP when the driver conforms to the NT 4.0 driver  
specification. As a result, Windows 2000 drivers can show up as Windows NT drivers.  
6. I added a Windows XP driver to the PSA, but it did not show up in the driver list.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Drivers for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 usually work with both Windows 2000 and Windows XP. Consequently,  
many vendors will label a driver as Windows 2000 or XP when the driver conforms to the NT 4.0 driver  
specification. Since there is no unique XP driver specification, drivers labeled by a printer vendor for XP will  
always appear as either NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 drivers.  
7. I am having problems with Windows 2000 drivers.  
Problems with Windows 2000 drivers can include:  
N-up (printing multiple pages in a reduced format on one page)  
booklet style (format the print job into a printed booklet)  
watermark (print a watermark on each page of the document)  
ZoomSmart (scales a letter-sized/A4 document or poster to tabloid/A3, or vice versa)  
back-to-front (prints the document in reverse order)  
rotate 180 degrees (rotates the document layout but not the paper)  
If you are having problems with any of these features, first update the firmware. If the problem persists,  
reinstall the driver and select the "Use client side rendering with this driver" checkbox when selecting the  
driver to use with the print share. The problem should then be resolved.  
8. What does it mean to "Use client side rendering with this driver"?  
A new Windows 2K and XP printer driver architecture has been developed where advanced printing features  
like the following are handled by a print processor in the print server:  
N-up (printing multiple pages in a reduced format on one page)  
booklet style (format the print job into a printed booklet)  
watermark (print a watermark on each page of the document)  
ZoomSmart (scales a letter-sized/A4 document or poster to tabloid/A3, or vice versa)  
back-to-front (prints the document in reverse order)  
rotate 180 degrees (rotates the document layout but not the paper)  
If you intend to use this 2K or XP version of the driver with the PSA, select "Use Client Side rendering".  
Power Outages  
1. How do I connect an uninterruptible power supply (UPS)?  
The PSA supports APC UPSs only in the Simple Signaling mode with a Simple Signaling cable (APC part #  
940-0020B). Connect the UPS cable to the connector labeled UPS on the back of the PSA.  
Note: The Simple Signaling cable is not included with the PSA or with the APC UPS. This cable can be  
ordered from APC (APC part # 940-0020B).  
2. How does an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) work with the PSA when the power fails?  
The UPS communication cable enables the UPS to signal the PSA to perform an orderly shutdown after a  
delay of about 60 seconds in the event of a power failure. During an orderly shutdown, processes are closed  
and data is saved. No configuration is necessary to enable UPS support, other than simply connecting the  
DB-9 cable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. What happens if the PSA experiences an unplanned power interruption?  
After a power outage the PSA will automatically recover and rebuild its settings as necessary. To reduce the  
chance of data loss, the PSA can be connected to a UPS. (See the questions regarding UPS below.)  
Print jobs that were printing and print jobs that were spooled but not printing will automatically resume  
when the PSA is powered up again. Print jobs that had not been spooled yet need to be resent.  
Loss of power could initially cause corruption of the data on the PSA hard disk. However, the PSA is  
designed to make internal data loss unlikely, since the corrupted data will be automatically corrected during  
its next uninterrupted bootup.  
It is always a good idea to have a backup of the settings and files in case they need to be restored.  
After a power outage or any other improper shutdown, the PSA may experience so many errors in its file  
system that it rebuilds the disk from the default image. The printers, network configuration, and drivers will  
be not be automatically restored. The configuration must be restored manually using the Restore  
functionality with the last configuration manually backed up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Warranty, Regulatory, and Licensing Information  
Links within this page:  
Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement  
HP Product  
Duration of Limited Warranty  
HP Print Server Appliance 4250 (J7941A) 1 year  
1. HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware, accessories, and supplies will be free from  
defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period of one (1) year. If HP  
receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace  
products that prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance  
to new.  
2. HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of  
purchase, for a period of NINETY (90) DAYS, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly  
installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the NINETY (90) day period, HP will replace  
software that does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.  
3. You are responsible for restoring any configuration or data. In no event will HP or its affiliates,  
subcontractors, or suppliers be liable for any of the following: damages for loss of data, or software  
restoration; damages relating to Customer's procurement of substitute products or services (i.e., "cost of  
cover"); or incidental, special or consequential damages (including downtime costs or lost profits).  
4. The remedies herein are the customer's sole and exclusive remedies.  
5. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable,  
within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled  
to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.  
6. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject  
to incidental use.  
7. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(b) software, interfacing, parts, or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d)  
operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site  
preparation or maintenance.  
8. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER  
WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP  
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,  
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries, states, or provinces  
do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might  
not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that  
vary from country to country, state to state, or province to province.  
9. HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of $300,000 or the actual  
amount paid for the product that is the subject of the claim, and for damages for bodily injury or death, to  
the extent that all such damages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly  
caused by a defective HP product.  
10. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR  
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS  
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL  
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR  
OTHERWISE. Some countries, states, or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or  
consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.  
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT  
EXCLUDE, RESTRICT, OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE  
TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.  
Local Warranty Statements  
"HP's limited warranty is valid in any country or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and  
where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local  
standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country for which it was  
never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons.  
Regulatory Statements  
FCC Statement (USA)  
General Information. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Pursuant to Part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, any changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by  
the Hewlett-Packard Company may cause interference and void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.  
The Federal Communications Commission has prepared a booklet titled Interference Handbook (1986), which may  
be helpful to you. This booklet (stock number 004-000-004505-7) may be purchased from the Superintendent of  
Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15  
of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against interference in a commercial environment. This  
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with  
the instructions, may cause interference to radio communications.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing this equipment in an FCC Level B product results in an FCC Level A Composite System (as defined in the  
FCC Rules and Regulations) when attached to an Ethernet (IEEE 802.3/802.3u) or Token Ring (IEEE 802.5) network.  
European Community  
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the  
user may be required to take adequate measures.  
Electromagnetic Emissions  
FCC part 15 Class A (U.S.A.), ICES-003 (Canada), CISPR-22/EN55022 Class A, AS/NZS 3548 (Australia/New  
Zealand).  
Note: For EU compliance, see the Declaration of Conformity.  
Safety Certifications  
Products comply with:  
IEC 950: (1991)+A1,A2,A3,A4/EN60950 (1992)+A1,A2,A3,A4  
UL 1950  
CSA 950  
NOM-019-SCFI-1994  
Australia  
This equipment complies with Australian EMC requirements.  
Canada  
This equipment complies with Canadian EMC Class-A requirements.  
Declaration of Conformity  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN45014  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company  
Manufacturer's Address: 8000 Foothills Blvd.  
Roseville, CA 95747-5677  
U.S.A.  
declares that the product:  
Product Name:  
HP Print Server Appliance 4250 (Model Number J7941A)  
HP Print Server Appliance 4200 (Model Number J4117A)  
HP JetDirect 4000 Network Print Appliance ( Model Number: J4107A)  
conforms to the following Product Specifications:  
Safety: EN60950 (1992) +A1,A2,A3,A4,AII / IEC 950 (1991) +A1, A2, A3, A4  
EN60825-1 (1994) / IEC 825-1 (1993), Class 1  
GB 4943 (1995)  
EMC: EN 55022 (1998) / CISPR-22 (1997) Class A  
GB 9254 (1988)  
EN 55024 (1998)  
IEC 61000-4-2 (1995); EN 61000-4-2 (1995)  
IEC 61000-4-3 (1995); EN 61000-4-3 (1996)  
IEC 61000-4-4 (1995); EN 61000-4-4 (1995)  
IEC 61000-4-5 (1995); EN 61000-4-5 (1995)  
IEC 61000-4-6 (1996); EN 61000-4-6 (1996)  
IEC 61000-4-8 (1993); EN 61000-4-8 (1993)  
IEC 61000-4-11 (1994); EN 61000-4-11 (1994)  
EN61000-3-2 (1995)  
EN61000-3-3 (1995)  
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A  
Supplementary Information:  
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the EMC  
Directive 89/336/EEC and carries the CE marking accordingly. Shielded cables are recommended to meet the  
above specifications.  
Tested with Hewlett-Packard Co. products only.  
Roseville, March 4, 2003  
Signature of HP Representative  
Jill Stevenson, Regulatory Manager  
European Contact: Your local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department  
TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 130, D-71034 Böblingen (FAX:+49-7031-14-3143).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Trademarks and Copyrights  
Copyright (C) Hewlett-Packard Co. 1999-2003  
This information is subject to change without notice and is provided "as is" with no warranty. Hewlett-Packard shall  
not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this  
material.  
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
Netscape and Netscape Navigator are U.S. registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation.  
APC and other names of APC products referenced herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of American  
Power Conversion Corporation.  
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.  
JetDirect is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.  
HP-UX Release 10.20 and later and HP-UX Release 11.00 and later (in both 32 and 64-bit configurations) on all HP  
9000 computers are Open Group UNIX 95 branded products.  
Solaris is a product of Sun Microsystems.  
Other product names are U.S. trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.  
HP Limited Warranty/Limitation of Liability  
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase,  
for a period of NINETY (90) DAYS, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If  
HP receives notice of such defects during the NINETY (90) day period, HP will replace software that does not  
execute its programming instructions due to such defects. HP does not warrant that the operation of the Software  
will be uninterrupted or error free.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY  
OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries, states, or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied  
warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights  
and you might also have other rights that vary from country to country, state to state, or province to province.  
HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of $300,000 or the actual amount  
paid for the product that is the subject of the claim, and for damages for bodily injury or death, to the extent that  
all such damages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective  
HP product.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND  
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR  
LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR  
OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries, states, or provinces do  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion  
may not apply to you.  
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT  
EXCLUDE, RESTRICT, OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE  
TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.  
HP Software License  
The following License Terms govern your use of the Software which is embedded in (firmware) or accompanies this  
product unless you have a separate signed agreement with HP.  
License Grant. HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the Software. "Use" means storing, loading, installing,  
executing or displaying the Software. You may not modify the Software or disable any licensing or control features  
of the Software. If the Software is licensed for "concurrent use", you may not allow more than the maximum  
number of authorized users to Use the Software concurrently.  
Ownership. The Software is owned and copyrighted by HP or its third party suppliers. Your license confers no title  
to, or ownership in, the Software and is not a sale of any rights in the Software. HP's third party suppliers may  
protect their rights in the event of any violation of these License Terms.  
Copies and Adaptations. You may only make copies or adaptations of the Software for archival purposes or when  
copying or adaptation is an essential step in the authorized Use of the Software. You must reproduce all copyright  
notices in the original Software on all copies or adaptations. You may not copy the Software onto any public  
network.  
No Disassembly or Decryption. You may not disassemble or decompile the Software unless HP's prior written  
consent is obtained. In some jurisdictions, HP's consent may not be required for limited disassembly or  
decompilation. Upon request, you will provide HP with reasonably detailed information regarding any disassembly or  
decompilation. You may not decrypt the Software unless decryption is a necessary part of the operation of the  
Software.  
Transfer. Your license will automatically terminate upon any transfer of the Software. Upon transfer, you must  
deliver the Software, including any copies and related documentation, to the transferee. The transferee must accept  
these License Terms as a condition to the transfer.  
Termination. HP may terminate your license upon notice for failure to comply with any of these License Terms.  
Upon termination, you must immediately destroy the Software, together with all copies, adaptations and merged  
portions in any form.  
Export Requirements. You may not export or re-export the Software or any copy or adaptation in violation of any  
applicable laws or regulations.  
U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The Software and any accompanying documentation have been developed  
entirely at private expense. They are delivered and licensed as "commercial computer software" as defined in  
DFARS 252.227-7013 (Oct 1988), DFARS 252.211-7015 (May 1991) or DFARS 252.227-7014 (Jun 1995), as a  
"commercial item" as defined in FAR 2.101(a), or as "Restricted computer software" as defined in FAR 52.227-19  
(Jun 1987)(or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause), whichever is applicable. You have only those  
rights provided for such Software and any accompanying documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or  
the HP standard software agreement for the product involved.  
Software Copyright Notices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copyright 1999-2003 Hewlett-Packard Company All rights reserved worldwide.  
Portions of this software are also:  
Copyright (c) 2000 Carnegie Mellon University  
Copyright (c) 1995-2001 The Internet Software Consortium  
Copyright (c) 2001 Python Software Foundation  
Copyright (c) 1983 Regents of the University of California  
Copyright (c) 1995-1997 The Apache Group  
Copyright (c) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.  
Copyright (c) 2000 Gregory Trubetskoy  
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 Ralf S. Engelschall  
Copyright (c) 1999-2001 John Coffman  
Copyright (c) 1996-2000 Julian R Seward  
Copyright (c) 1990, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998 Sleepycat Software  
Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 The President and Fellows of Harvard University  
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper  
Copyright (c) 1995-1998 Eric Young  
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project  
Copyright (c) 1988 - 1997, Julianne F. Haugh  
Copyright (c) 1991, 1992 Paul Kranenburg  
Copyright (c) 1993 Branko Lankester  
Copyright (c) 1993 Ulrich Pegelow  
Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Michael Elizabeth Chastain  
Copyright (c) 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 Rick Sladkey  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copyright (c) 1999,2000 Wichert Akkerman  
Copyright (c) 1995 by Wietse Venema  
Copyright (c) 1990-2001 Info-ZIP  
Copyright (c) 1988,1990,1993 by Paul Vixie  
Copyright (c) 1992 by Panagiotis Tsirigotis  
Copyright (c) 1995-1998 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler  
Copyright (c) 1994-1996,1998-2002  
Other Software Licenses  
This product includes software licensed under the GNU General Public License and other open source licenses.  
Copies of these licenses and information about obtaining source code for software licensed under the GNU GPL are  
available below.  
To obtain source code for product software licensed under the GNU GPL and under Sleepycat Software, make a  
written request to Hewlett-Packard at:  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
Connectivity Technical Marketing  
8000 Foothills Blvd., MS 5661  
Roseville, CA 95747  
This product includes software developed by:  
the Open SSL Project for use in the Open SSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)  
Gregory Trubetskoy  
Eric Young  
Tim Hudson  
Copyright (c) 2000 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. The name "Carnegie Mellon University" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this  
software without prior written permission. For permission or any other legal details, please contact:  
Office of Technology Transfer  
Carnegie Mellon University  
5000 Forbes Avenue  
Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(412) 268-4387, fax: (412) 268-7395  
4. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes  
software developed by Computing Services at Carnegie Mellon University (http://www.cmu.edu/  
computing/)."  
CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING  
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL CARNEGIE MELLON  
UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES  
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,  
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR  
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.  
Copyright (c) 1995-2001  
The Internet Software Consortium. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
Neither the name of The Internet Software Consortium - DHCP nor the names of its contributors may be used to  
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  
INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF  
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER  
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING  
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF  
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
PSF LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 2.2  
1. This LICENSE AGREEMENT is between the Python Software Foundation ("PSF"), and the Individual or  
Organization ("Licensee") accessing and otherwise using Python 2.2 software in source or binary form and  
its associated documentation.  
2. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, PSF hereby grants Licensee a nonexclusive,  
royalty-free, world-wide license to reproduce, analyze, test, perform and/or display publicly, prepare  
derivative works, distribute, and otherwise use Python 2.2 alone or in any derivative version, provided,  
however, that PSF's License Agreement and PSF's notice of copyright, i.e., "Copyright (c) 2001 Python  
Software Foundation; All Rights Reserved" are retained in Python 2.2 alone or in any derivative version  
prepared by Licensee.  
3. In the event Licensee prepares a derivative work that is based on or incorporates Python 2.2 or any part  
thereof, and wants to make the derivative work available to others as provided herein, then Licensee  
hereby agrees to include in any such work a brief summary of the changes made to Python 2.2.  
4. PSF is making Python 2.2 available to Licensee on an "AS IS" basis. PSF MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR  
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. BY WAY OF EXAMPLE, BUT NOT LIMITATION, PSF MAKES NO AND  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DISCLAIMS ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THAT THE USE OF PYTHON 2.2 WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.  
5. PSF SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE OR ANY OTHER USERS OF PYTHON 2.2 FOR ANY INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS AS A RESULT OF MODIFYING, DISTRIBUTING, OR  
OTHERWISE USING PYTHON 2.2, OR ANY DERIVATIVE THEREOF, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY  
THEREOF.  
6. This License Agreement will automatically terminate upon a material breach of its terms and conditions.  
7. Nothing in this License Agreement shall be deemed to create any relationship of agency, partnership, or  
joint venture between PSF and Licensee. This License Agreement does not grant permission to use PSF  
trademarks or trade name in a trademark sense to endorse or promote products or services of Licensee, or  
any third party.  
8. By copying, installing or otherwise using Python 2.2, Licensee agrees to be bound by the terms and  
conditions of this License Agreement.  
Copyright (c) 1983 Regents of the University of California.  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following  
acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its  
contributors.  
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote  
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,  
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;  
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF  
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Copyright (c) 1995-1997 The Apache Group.  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following  
acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the Apache Group for use in the Apache  
HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)."  
4. The names "Apache Server" and "Apache Group" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived  
from this software without prior written permission.  
5. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
software developed by the Apache Group for use in the Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.  
org/)."  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE APACHE GROUP ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE GROUP OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,  
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN  
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF  
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Group and was  
originally based on public domain software written at the National Center for Supercomputing Applications,  
University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign. For more information on the Apache Group and the Apache HTTP server  
project, please see <http://www.apache.org/>.  
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (c) 1989, 1991  
Free Software Foundation, Inc.  
59 Temple Place, Suite 330,  
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not  
allowed.  
Preamble  
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the  
GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make  
sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software  
Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software  
Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your  
programs, too.  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed  
to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you  
wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it  
in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to  
surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the  
software, or if you modify it.  
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all  
the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must  
show them these terms so they know their rights.  
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you  
legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.  
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to  
know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the  
original authors' reputations.  
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that  
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To  
prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.  
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.  
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying  
it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such  
program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under  
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications  
and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term  
"modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".  
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its  
scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its  
contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).  
Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium,  
provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and  
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and  
give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for  
the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the  
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you  
also meet all of these conditions:  
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files  
and the date of any change.  
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is  
derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third  
parties under the terms of this License.  
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it,  
when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an  
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or  
else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these  
conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself  
is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program  
is not required to print an announcement.)  
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from  
the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License,  
and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute  
the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each  
and every part regardless of who wrote it.  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,  
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based  
on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of  
this License.  
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable  
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:  
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be  
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software  
interchange; or,  
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a  
charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-  
readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and  
2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,  
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source  
code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the  
program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)  
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable  
work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface  
definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special  
exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or  
binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the  
executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.  
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering  
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even  
though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.  
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License.  
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically  
terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this  
License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.  
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you  
permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do  
not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program),  
you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or  
modifying the Program or works based on it.  
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives  
a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions.  
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not  
responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited  
to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict  
the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so  
as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a  
consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-  
free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only  
way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the  
section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest  
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software  
distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous  
contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of  
that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other  
system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.  
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.  
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted  
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical  
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not  
thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.  
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time  
to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new  
problems or concerns.  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License  
which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that  
version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version  
number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.  
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are  
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software  
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be  
guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the  
sharing and reuse of software generally.  
NO WARRANTY  
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE  
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT  
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER  
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE  
PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY  
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT  
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE,  
BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO  
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY  
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs  
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to  
achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.  
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to  
most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a  
pointer to where the full notice is found.  
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>  
Copyright (C) 19yy <name of author>  
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU  
General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the  
License, or (at your option) any later version.  
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without  
even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the  
GNU General Public License for more details.  
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not,  
write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307  
USA  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.  
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:  
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author  
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.  
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'  
for details.  
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public  
License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could  
even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright  
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
`Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.  
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program  
is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If  
this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.  
GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1991  
Free Software Foundation, Inc.  
59 Temple Place, Suite 330,  
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not  
allowed. [This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the  
ordinary GPL.]  
Preamble  
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the  
GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make  
sure the software is free for all its users.  
This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some specially designated Free Software Foundation  
software, and to any other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for your libraries, too.  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed  
to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you  
wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it  
in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to  
surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the  
library, or if you modify it.  
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the  
rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link a  
program with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with  
the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they  
know their rights.  
Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright the library, and (2) offer you this license which  
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.  
Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty  
for this free library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that  
what they have is not the original version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original  
authors' reputations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies  
distributing free software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the program into  
proprietary software. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free  
use or not licensed at all.  
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License, which was  
designed for utility programs. This license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain designated  
libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that  
anything in it is the same as in the ordinary license.  
The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that they blur the distinction we usually make  
between modifying or adding to a program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without changing  
the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is analogous to running a utility program or application  
program. However, in a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a derivative of the  
original library, and the ordinary General Public License treats it as such.  
Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General Public License for libraries did not effectively promote  
software sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker conditions might  
promote sharing better.  
However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the users of those programs of all benefit from  
the free status of the libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to permit developers of  
non-free programs to use free libraries, while preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the  
free libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve this as regards changes in header  
files, but we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will  
lead to faster development of free libraries.  
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the  
difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code  
derived from the library, while the latter only works together with the library.  
Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary General Public License rather than by this special  
one.  
GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or  
other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library General Public License (also  
called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".  
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with  
application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.  
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A  
"work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a  
work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated  
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term  
"modification".)  
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition  
files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.  
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its  
scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered  
only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing  
it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any  
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice  
and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;  
and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.  
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty  
protection in exchange for a fee.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library,  
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also  
meet all of these conditions:  
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.  
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files  
and the date of any change.  
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the  
terms of this License.  
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an  
application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is  
invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not  
supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose  
remains meaningful.  
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-  
defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-  
supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply  
it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)  
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from  
the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License,  
and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute  
the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on  
the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and  
every part regardless of who wrote it.  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,  
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on  
the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this  
License.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given  
copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the  
ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the  
ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not  
make any other change in these notices.  
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License  
applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.  
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.  
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or  
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete  
corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above  
on a medium customarily used for software interchange.  
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent  
access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even  
though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.  
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by  
being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a  
derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.  
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the  
Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is  
therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.  
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for  
the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is  
especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for  
this to be true is not precisely defined by law.  
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and  
small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of  
whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still  
fall under Section 6.)  
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the  
terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked  
directly with the Library itself.  
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or link a "work that uses the Library" with the  
Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice,  
provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for  
debugging such modifications.  
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its  
use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays  
copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference  
directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:  
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the  
Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the  
complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that  
the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the  
modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the  
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)  
b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the  
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this  
distribution.  
c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer  
equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.  
d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent  
this user a copy.  
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs  
needed for eproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need  
not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components  
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself  
accompanies the executable.  
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not  
normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library  
together in an executable that you distribute.  
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with  
other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the  
separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and  
provided that you do these two things:  
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined  
with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.  
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the  
Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.  
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this  
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will  
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from  
you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.  
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you  
permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do  
not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you  
indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or  
modifying the Library or works based on it.  
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a  
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and  
conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You  
are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not  
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that  
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot  
distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations,  
then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit  
royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the  
only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the  
section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest  
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software  
distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous  
contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of  
that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other  
system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.  
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.  
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted  
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical  
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not  
thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.  
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Library General Public License  
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to  
address new problems or concerns.  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License  
which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that  
version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license  
version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.  
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are  
incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free  
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision  
will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting  
the sharing and reuse of software generally.  
NO WARRANTY  
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE  
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT  
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER  
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE  
LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY  
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT  
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE,  
BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS  
OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY  
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries  
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend  
making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under  
these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).  
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each  
source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright"  
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.  
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>  
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>  
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU  
Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the  
License, or (at your option) any later version.  
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without  
even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the  
GNU Library General Public License for more details.  
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with this library; if  
not, write to the Free Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright  
disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking  
knobs) written by James Random Hacker.  
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
That's all there is to it!  
====================================================================  
Copyright (c) 2000 Gregory Trubetskoy. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowledgment:  
"This product includes software developed by Gregory Trubetskoy." Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in  
the software itself, if and wherever such third-party acknowledgments normally appear.  
4. The names "mod_python", "modpython" or "Gregory Trubetskoy" must not be used to endorse or promote  
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact  
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "mod_python" or "modpython", nor may "mod_python" or  
"modpython" appear in their names without prior written permission of Gregory Trubetskoy.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY GREGORY TRUBETSKOY ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL GREGORY TRUBETSKOY OR HIS  
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF  
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY  
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
====================================================================  
This software is based on the original concept as published in the book "Internet Programming with Python" by  
Aaron Watters, Guido van Rossum and James C. Ahlstrom, 1996 M&T Books, ISBN: 1-55851-484-8. The book and  
original software is Copyright 1996 by M&T Books.  
This software consists of an extension to the Apache http server.  
More information about Apache may be found at http://www.apache.org/  
More information on Python language can be found at http://www.python.org/  
The mod_ssl package falls under the Open-Source Software label because it's distributed under a BSD-style license.  
The detailed license information follows.  
====================================================================  
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 Ralf S. Engelschall. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:  
"This product includes software developed by Ralf S. Engelschall <[email protected]> for use in the mod_ssl  
project (http://www.modssl.org/)."  
4. The names "mod_ssl" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior  
written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].  
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "mod_ssl" nor may "mod_ssl" appear in their names  
without prior written permission of Ralf S. Engelschall.  
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes  
software developed by Ralf S. Engelschall <[email protected]> for use in the mod_ssl project (http://www.  
modssl.org/)."  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY RALF S. ENGELSCHALL ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL RALF S. ENGELSCHALL OR HIS  
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF  
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY  
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
====================================================================  
The OpenLDAP Public License  
Version 2.5, 11 May 2001  
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation  
("Software"), with or without modification, are permitted provided  
that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain copyright statements and notices.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices, this list of conditions,  
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.  
4. The names and trademarks of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to  
promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific, written prior permission.  
5. Due credit should be given to the authors of the Software.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each revision is distinguished by a version  
number. You may use the Software under terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent  
revision of the license.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  
OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,  
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;  
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF  
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
OpenLDAP is a trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.  
Copyright 1999-2001 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City,  
California, USA. All Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and  
distributed verbatim copies of this document is granted.  
Copyright 1999-2001 John Coffman.  
All rights reserved.  
License  
=======  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
Neither the names of the author(s) nor the names of other contributors may be used to endorse or promote  
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
Disclaimer  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS  
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,  
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN  
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF  
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(Note: The above license is copied from the BSD license at:  
http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.html, substituting the appropriate references in the template.)  
(end)  
This program, "bzip2" and associated library "libbzip2", are copyright (C) 1996-2000 Julian R Seward. All rights  
reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
2. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software.  
If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is  
not required.  
3. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original  
software.  
4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without  
specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,  
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS  
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT  
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Julian Seward, Cambridge, UK.  
bzip2/libbzip2 version 1.0 of 21 March 2000  
The following are the copyrights and redistribution conditions that apply to this copy of the Berkeley DB software.  
For a license to use, redistribute or sell Berkeley DB software under conditions other than those described here, or  
to purchase support for this software, please contact Sleepycat Software at one of the following addresses:  
Sleepycat Software  
394 E. Riding Dr.  
Carlisle, MA 01741  
USA  
+1-617-633-2429  
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copyright (c) 1990, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998  
Sleepycat Software. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. Redistributions in any form must be accompanied by information on how to obtain complete source code for the  
DB software and any accompanying software that uses the DB software. The source code must either be included in  
the distribution or be available for no more than the cost of distribution plus a nominal fee, and must be freely  
redistributable under reasonable conditions. For an executable file, complete source code means the source code for  
all modules it contains. It does not mean source code for modules or files that typically accompany the operating  
system on which the executable file runs, e.g., standard library modules or system header files.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY SLEEPYCAT SOFTWARE ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL SLEEPYCAT SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,  
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS  
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT  
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Copyright (c) 1995, 1996  
The President and Fellows of Harvard University. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following  
acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by Harvard University and its contributors.  
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote  
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY HARVARD AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL HARVARD OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,  
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;  
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF  
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper  
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated  
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the  
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit  
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:  
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the  
Software.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND  
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,  
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,  
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.  
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])  
All rights reserved.  
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).  
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.  
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The  
following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just  
the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except  
that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).  
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.  
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library  
used.  
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided  
with the package.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following  
acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])" The  
word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).  
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you  
must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR  
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF  
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.  
e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]  
====================================================================  
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:  
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.  
openssl.org/)"  
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived  
from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.  
org.  
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names  
without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.  
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes  
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS  
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF  
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
====================================================================  
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes  
software written by Tim  
Hudson ([email protected]). This software is copyright 1988 - 1997, Julianne F. Haugh. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. Neither the name of Julianne F. Haugh nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote  
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY JULIE HAUGH AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL JULIE HAUGH OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,  
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;  
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF  
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Copyright (c) 1991, 1992 Paul Kranenburg <[email protected]>  
Copyright (c) 1993 Branko Lankester <[email protected]>  
Copyright (c) 1993 Ulrich Pegelow <[email protected]>  
Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Michael Elizabeth Chastain <[email protected]>  
Copyright (c) 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 Rick Sladkey <[email protected]>  
Copyright (c) 1999,2000 Wichert Akkerman <[email protected]>  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without  
specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,  
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS  
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT  
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
/************************************************************************  
* Copyright 1995 by Wietse Venema. All rights reserved. Some individual  
* files may be covered by other copyrights.  
*
* This material was originally written and compiled by Wietse Venema at  
* Eindhoven University of Technology, The Netherlands, in 1990, 1991,  
* 1992, 1993, 1994 and 1995.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted  
* provided that this entire copyright notice is duplicated in all such  
* copies.  
*
* This software is provided "as is" and without any expressed or implied  
* warranties, including, without limitation, the implied warranties of  
* merchantibility and fitness for any particular purpose.  
************************************************************************/  
This is version 2001-Jan-27 of the Info-ZIP copyright and license.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The definitive version of this document should be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html  
indefinitely.  
Copyright (c) 1990-2001 Info-ZIP. All rights reserved.  
For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Info-ZIP" is defined as the following set of individuals: Mark Adler,  
John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ian Gorman, Chris  
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee,  
Onno van der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs,  
Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Christian Spieler, Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich Wales,  
Mike White  
This software is provided "as is," without warranty of any kind, express or implied. In no event shall Info-ZIP or its  
contributors be held liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential damages arising out of the  
use of or inability to use this software.  
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to  
alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list of  
conditions.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list of  
conditions in documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. Altered versions--including, but not limited to, ports to new operating systems, existing ports with new graphical  
interfaces, and dynamic, shared, or static library versions--must be plainly marked as such and must not be  
misrepresented as being the original source. Such altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info-  
ZIP releases--including, but not limited to, labeling of the altered versions with the names "Info-ZIP" (or any  
variation thereof, including, but not limited to, different capitalizations), "Pocket UnZip," "WiZ" or "MacZip" without  
the explicit permission of Info-ZIP. Such altered versions are further prohibited from misrepresentative use of the  
Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail addresses or of the Info-ZIP URL(s).  
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use the names "Info-ZIP," "Zip," "UnZip," "WiZ," "Pocket UnZip," "Pocket Zip," and  
"MacZip" for its own source and binary releases. Vim is Charityware. You can use and copy it as much as you like,  
but you are encouraged to make a donation to orphans in Uganda. Please read the file "doc/uganda.txt" for details.  
There are no restrictions on distributing an unmodified copy of Vim. Parts of Vim may also be distributed, but this  
text must always be included. You are allowed to include executables that you made from the unmodified Vim  
sources, your own usage examples and Vim scripts.  
If you distribute a modified version of Vim, you are encouraged to send the maintainer a copy, including the source  
code. Or make it available to the maintainer through ftp; let him know where it can be found. If the number of  
changes is small (e.g., a modified Makefile) e-mailing the diffs will do.  
When the maintainer asks for it (in any way) you must make your changes, including source code, available to him.  
The maintainer reserves the right to include any changes in the official version of Vim. This is negotiable. You are  
not allowed to distribute a modified version of Vim when you are not willing to make the source code available to  
the maintainer.  
The current maintainer is Bram Moolenaar <[email protected]>. If this changes, it will be announced in appropriate  
places (most likely www.vim.org and comp.editors). When it is completely impossible to contact the maintainer, the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
obligation to send him modified source code ceases.  
It is not allowed to remove these restrictions from the distribution of the Vim sources or parts of it. These  
restrictions may also be used for previous Vim releases instead of the text that was included with it.  
Copyright 1988,1990,1993 by Paul Vixie  
All rights reserved  
Distribute freely, except: don't remove my name from the source or documentation (don't take credit for my work),  
mark your changes (don't get me blamed for your possible bugs), don't alter or remove this notice. May be sold if  
buildable source is provided to buyer. No warrantee of any kind, express or implied, is included with this software;  
use at your own risk, responsibility for damages (if any) to anyone resulting from the use of this software rests  
entirely with the user.  
Send bug reports, bug fixes, enhancements, requests, flames, etc., and I'll try to keep a version up to date. I can  
be reached as follows:  
Paul Vixie  
<[email protected]>uunet!decwrl!vixie!paul  
(c) Copyright 1992 by Panagiotis Tsirigotis  
The author (Panagiotis Tsirigotis) grants permission to use, copy,  
and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose  
and without fee, provided that the above copyright notice extant in  
files in this distribution is not removed from files included in any  
redistribution and that this copyright notice is also included in any  
redistribution.  
Modifications to this software may be distributed, either by distributing  
the modified software or by distributing patches to the original software,  
under the following additional terms:  
1. The version number will be modified as follows:  
a. The first 3 components of the version number (i.e <number>.<number>.<number>) will remain unchanged.  
b. A new component will be appended to the version number to indicate the modification level. The form of this  
component is up to the author of the modifications.  
2. The author of the modifications will include his/her name by appending it along with the new version number to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
this file and will be responsible for any wrong behavior of the modified software. The author makes no  
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without any express or  
implied warranty.  
Modifications:  
Version: 2.1.8.7-current  
Copyright 1998-2001 by Rob Braun  
Sensor Addition  
Version: 2.1.8.9pre14a  
Copyright 2001 by Steve Grubb  
This is an exerpt from an email I recieved from the original author, allowing xinetd as maintained by me, to use the  
higher version numbers:  
I appreciate your maintaining the version string guidelines as specified in the copyright. But I did not mean them to  
last as long as they did.  
So, if you want, you may use any 2.N.* (N >= 3) version string for future xinetd versions that you release. Note  
that I am excluding the 2.2.* line; using that would only create confusion. Naming the next release 2.3.0 would put  
to rest the confusion about 2.2.1 and 2.1.8.*.  
(C) 1995-1998 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler  
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable  
for any damages arising from the use of this software.  
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to  
alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:  
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software.  
If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is  
not required.  
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original  
software.  
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.  
Jean-loup Gailly  
Mark Adler  
If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not*  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
receiving lengthy legal documents to sign. The sources are provided  
for free but without warranty of any kind. The library has been  
entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does not  
include third-party code.  
If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include  
in the file ChangeLog history information documenting your changes.  
Copyright (c) 1994-1996,1998-2002 Todd C. Miller <[email protected]>  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without  
specific prior written permission from the author.  
4. Products derived from this software may not be called "Sudo" nor may "Sudo" appear in their names without  
specific prior written permission from the author.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE  
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND  
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE  
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Additionally, lsearch.c, fnmatch.c, getcwd.c, snprintf.c, strcasecmp.c and fnmatch.3 bear the following UCB license:  
Copyright (c) 1987, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1993, 1994  
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote  
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,  
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;  
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF  
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Greenheck Fan Ventilation Hood DFD M210 User Manual
Greenheck Fan Ventilation Hood ERV User Manual
Grundig DVD Player GDP 3564 User Manual
H2O Audio Carrying Case D2 1C1 User Manual
Haan Iron TS 30 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Drill 94944 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Portable Generator 69672 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Welder 6098 User Manual
Hasbro Games 59870 User Manual
Humax Car Satellite TV System LUG 17DS User Manual